Chrysler - Aspen - Owners Manual - 2007 - 2007

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 3 4 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ▫ Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents. You are urged to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Roll Over Warning Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance, higher center of gravity, and narrower track than many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can be caused to go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not. Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, roll over of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully. Roll Over Warning Label INTRODUCTION 5 Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year, and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 million annually. In a roll over crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up. NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings. When it comes to service, remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in your satisfaction. WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a complete listing of all subjects. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner’s manual: 1 6 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehcile registration and title. 1 VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN. 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Locking Doors With The Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 䡵 Ignition And Steering Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Ignition Accessory Delay Feature . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks . . . .19 䡵 Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .23 䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 ▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . .25 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .44 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ Second Row Center Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 ▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Rear 60/40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point Belt — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection (Driver’s And Front Passenger Door Only) . . . .32 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 ▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .50 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 ▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags . . . . . . . . . . .51 ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 ▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .71 䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place. Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and remove the key. Ignition Switch Positions Ignition Key NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service. WARNING! Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock lubrication. IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK In the LOCK position, the steering and ignition systems are locked to provide anti-theft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your vehicle, if the steering wheel is locked. Move the steering wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns easily. The key can be 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE inserted or withdrawn only in the LOCK position. Push in on the key in the ignition lock cylinder to rotate to the LOCK position. WARNING! The key cannot be turned to LOCK until the selector is in the PARK position. Do not attempt to pull the shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK position. NOTE: The steering wheel will lock when the key is removed, and the steering wheel is turned around 115 degrees clockwise or 65 degrees counterclockwise from the center position. Ignition Switch Positions Ignition Accessory Delay Feature For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),the power window switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. For details, refer to “KEY OFF POWER DELAY > OFF” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual. SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2) seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine. NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle. During normal operation, after turning on the ignition switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two (2) seconds. 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. Replacement Keys NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN. This number is required for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed and needs to be cut. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced, bring all vehicle keys to the dealer. Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid keys by doing the following: 1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code. 2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key. 3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing, turn on again for 3 seconds, and then turn off. General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys. If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer for details. • This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed. • This device may not cause harmful interference. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors, liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the system provides both audible and visual signals. The horn will sound repeatedly for 3 minutes and the headlights and security light in the instrument cluster will flash for an additional 15 minutes. The engine will not run until the system is disarmed. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Set the Alarm: The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are locked and closed the security light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming. The security light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed. NOTE: If the security light stays on continuously during vehicle operation, have the system checked by your dealer. To Disarm the System: Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the doors. If something has triggered the system in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering. The security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unprogrammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine will start and run for 2 seconds and then shut down. After six unsuccessul attempts at starting the engine, the system will shut down until the correct key is used. To exit alarming mode, press the RKE Unlock button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key. The security alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit. NOTE: You may accidentally activate the security system (horn sounds and lights flash) by entering the vehicle without using the key fob to unlock the door(s). The security system can be disarmed with the key fob’s UNLOCK button or by inserting a programmed Sentry Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 ILLUMINATED ENTRY REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the doors are unlocked using the key fob. 2 The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either the ignition is turned to the ON position or a key fob LOCK button is pressed. There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the interior lights off after 8 minutes if the ignition is OFF and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position. Five Button Transmitter NOTE: For the remote starting feature (if equipped), refer to the “Remote Starting System” section. NOTE: For the power liftgate feature (if equipped), refer to the “Power Liftgate” section. 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Your vehicle’s keyfob may have three, four or five buttons (shown), depending on the optional features purchased with your vehicle. The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure: This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a minimum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. 1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob. NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects. To unlock the doors and liftgate: Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the parking lights will flash on twice. 2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the UNLOCK button. 3. Release both buttons at the same time. 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps. To lock the doors and liftgate: Press and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once. Horn Chirp Programming The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure: 1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the key fob. 2. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds. 3. Release both buttons at the same time. 4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps. 5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob, while you are inside the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. 6. If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps. Flash Lamps with Lock Programming 1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob. 2. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds, also press the LOCK button within 6 seconds. 3. Release both buttons at the same time. 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF position, and the key removed. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. 5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps. Using the Panic Alarm To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once. When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash, and the horn will sound. To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is started or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). During the Panic Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped. General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle. If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions. Use the Following procedure to program additional key fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key: 1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of batteries is five years. 1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors. 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile or CB radios. Programming Additional Transmitters Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob. 2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure). 3. Place the key into the ignition. 4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the engine ). 5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob. 6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds, also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds. 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard. 8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously. 9. A single chime will be heard. 10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and release the UNLOCK button on the fob. 11. A single chime will be heard. 12. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional fobs. 13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard. After 60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally. NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact your dealer for details. Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. 1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves together. 4. Replace screw if equipped. NOTE: If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall and tighten the screw until snug. REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting system, which will allow the vehicle to be started up to 300 feet away from the vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is part of your ignition key. Transmitter Battery Replacement 2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. In order to remote start your vehicle, the hood, liftgate, and all the doors must be closed. 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To remote start your vehicle, press the REMOTE START button on the key fob twice within three seconds. To indicate that the vehicle is about to start, the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly. Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes. To cancel remote start, press the REMOTE START button once. To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the key fob. After the vehicle is unlocked, you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle, insert the key in the Ignition and move it to the RUN position, otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and automatically turn off. Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur: • If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 • Any engine warning lamps come on Remote Start Transmitter • • • • The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of park Pressing the brake pedal. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start, where the remote start sequence was initiated but cancelled before the engine begins to crank. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position, then back to LOCK. DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks All the doors can be “manually” locked from the inside by pushing down the door lock plunger, located at the rear of the door. Both front doors may be opened from the inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked position. WARNING! • For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key. Automatic Door Locks If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). Automatic Door Lock Programming This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure: Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power 1. Enter your vehicle and Close all doors. 2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 3. Place the key into the ignition. 4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position a minimum of four times; ending in the ON position. (do not start the engine). 5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch in the LOCK direction. 6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled. 7. To re-activate this feature, repeat the above steps. 8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat the above procedure. Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened (excluding the liftgate). This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle has been driven (shifted out of Park and all doors closed). This feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks (Lock or Unlock). Auto Unlock On Exit Programming — If Equipped Customer Programming sequence to enable or disable the Auto Unlock Feature: 1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors. 2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this programming procedure). 3. Insert the key into the ignition. 4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position a minimum of four times ending in the ON position (do not start the engine). 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction. 6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed. 7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature. 8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat the above procedure. Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the childprotection door lock system. Child Lock To use the system, open each rear door and slide the control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage the child-protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged. WINDOWS Power Windows 2 NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle. Power Window Switch The control on the left front door has up-down switches that give you finger tip control of all four power windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the passenger doors for passenger window control. The 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE windows will operate only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and for ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened. This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer. NOTE: The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for ten minutes after the ignition it turned OFF. WARNING! Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Auto Down The driver’s and front passenger window switch has an Auto Down feature. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch. Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection (Driver’s and Front Passenger Door Only) Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto-closure it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually. Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors. To disable the window controls on the other doors, press the window lock button. To enable the window controls, press the window control button again. WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing. Resetting the Auto-Up Feature Should the Auto-Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up: Pull the window switch up and close the window completely, then pull and hold the switch for 1 second. Window Lockout Switch 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors. NOTE: When the engine is running from a Remote Start (if equipped), the vehicle must first be unlocked by pressing the remote transmitter UNLOCK button prior to activating the Power Liftgate otherwise the engine will stop automatically. Five Button Transmitter Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release switch located in the exterior handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). NOTE: • If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate, pressing the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the liftgate is closed. Power Liftgate — If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Press the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate. When the remote keyless entry transmitter button is press two times and the “Lamp Flash” feature is enabled the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing. The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the switch located on the overhead console. 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate trim panel. WARNING! During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away. A beeping signal will sound two seconds before the liftgate starts to open or close. NOTE: • If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance. Power Liftgate Switch • There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 • The power liftgate must be in the full open position for any of the buttons to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, press the remote keyless entry transmitter or overhead console button to fully open the liftgate and then press again to close. • The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below ⫺22° F (⫺30° C) or temperatures above 150° F (65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches. • If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position. • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually. • If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation. • If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power close. However, vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction. • The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather. OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, knee bolsters, front airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and left and right side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature (refer to the Child Restraint section in this manual), can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING! In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. Pulling Out Belt and Latchplate 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap. Removing Slack From Belt 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. • A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. And a belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. Removing Slack From Belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your dealer and have it fixed. 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If the front airbags are deployed the front pretensioning retractors must be replaced. 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front and second row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck. Push in on the anchorage release button to release the anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best. Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in the desired position. Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING! A 20% seatback that is not fully latched in the upright position will not protect you properly. Second Row Center Seat Belt The center seating position in the second row has a seat belt assembly that can be converted from the normal emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode. The seat belt should only be used in the automatic locking mode when a child seat is installed at this seating location. When sitting in this seating location, ensure the seatback is fully engaged with the seatback latch by pushing rearward on the center seatback until you hear a click that signals latch engagement. Automatic Locking Mode To convert from the normal emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder belt portion and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor. Allow some of the webbing to retract into the retractor, as the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound to indicate the seat belt is now in the automatic locking mode. Once the automatic locking mode has been activated, you will not be able pull the webbing back out of the retractor. To disengage the automatic locking mode, simply allow the seat belt to retract fully into the retractor to return the seat belt to the normal emergency locking mode. 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Rear 60/40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point Belt — If Equipped The center three point seat belt for the third row rear seat may be disconnected to allow the 60% seat back to easily fold down. The keyed-buckle latch plate (small latch plate at the end of the belt) can be detached from the keyed seat belt buckle (buckle without a red release button) located on the left inboard side of the third row bench seat. Insert the ignition key into the center white slot on the keyed buckle. The small latchplate can be removed when the key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take up the surplus webbing, and insert the latch plates into the slots in the headliner for storage while the 60% seat back is folded down. WARNING! • If the small (keyed buckle) latch plate and keyed buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide the proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision. • When reattaching the small (keyed buckle) latch plate and keyed buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceeding procedure to detach the small latch plate from the keyed buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the small latch plate and keyed buckle. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 2 Third Row Center Seat Belt To reattach the seat belt to the third row center seat, pull the small (keyed buckle) latch plate forward from the headliner slots and insert it into the keyed buckle until there is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the proper seat belt usage. Third Row Center Seat Belt 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced. Headliner Stowage Slots Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of a collision. These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert) If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). Once the warning is triggered it can be paused if the vehicle speed drops below 5 mph (8 km/h. The warning will be restarted if the vehicle speed becomes greater than 5 mph. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps: NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert). 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver’s seat belt. DO NOT start the engine or press the trip reset button. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the seat belt Warning Light to turn off. If during this time, the seat belt becomes unbuckled or the engine is cranked or started, programming will be cancelled. 3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled. A chime will sound immediately (once the feature has toggled). If during this time the ignition switch is turned out of the ON position or the timer expires, programming mode will be cancelled. 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Programming mode will be cancelled after the feature has toggled with the seat belt still buckled or if the ignition switch is turned to the lock position or 10 seconds after the feature has toggled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure. NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled. Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it. WARNING! Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers. NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment. The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size. This vehicle is also equipped with window bags to protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The window bags are located above the side windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG. This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment. 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them. You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional. These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating. • Your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag. The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions. • Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the window bags. Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions and occupant size. The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag. 1. Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly. 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate. 4. If your vehicle has window bags, do not lean against the door or window, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door. 5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section later in this owner’s manual. 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags. • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • The window bags also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. Air Bag System Components The airbag system consists of the following: • Occupant Restraint Controller • Side Remote Acceleration Sensors • Airbag Warning Light • Driver Airbag • Passenger Airbag • Window Bags above Side Windows • Steering Wheel and Column • Instrument Panel • Interconnecting Wiring • Knee Impact Bolsters • Front Acceleration Sensors • Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 How the Airbag System Works • The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not detect roll over. The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions. These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate. During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone. Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light in the instrument cluster for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up. WARNING! Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right away. 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. • The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC (with side impact option) detects a collision requiring the window bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The window bag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9 cm) thick when it is inflated. • The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 The following requirements must be strictly adhered to: • Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way. • Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle. • Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover. • Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar. • At no time should any supplemental restraint system (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/ Mopar. If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and then immediately deflate. NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system. This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system. If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur: • The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal byproduct of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. • It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING! Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the airbags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING! • • • • Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters. It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system. Enhanced Accident Response System If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional, vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition, approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition switch is turned off. Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in an impact. While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system promptly: • The airbag light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. • The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval. 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working, the airbag control module may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your dealer if the fuse is good. Event Data Recorder (EDR) In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations. In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the US government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when: 1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2. Used in defense of litigation DaimlerChrysler Corporation product involving a Data Parameters that May Be Recorded: • Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status for electronically-controlled safety systems, including the airbag system • Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped) • ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage) • Airbag deployment level (if applicable) • Seatbelt status • Brake status (service and parking brakes) • Accelerator status (including vehicle speed) 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant • Engine control status (including engine speed) 4. Otherwise required by law • Cruise control status • Traction/stability control status 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time - babies and children, too. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child: Infants and Small Children • This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car bed must be installed in the second seating row only. • Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing: infant carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. • The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System section.) • Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position. Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older than one year. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System Section.) The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt. Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. • The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible. • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal to the infant. Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint: • Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it. • The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits. • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it. • The second row outside seating positions and all third row seats have cinching latch plates. The second row center position has an automatic locking retractor. These are designed to keep the lap portion tight THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor, it will have a distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙ earlier in this section. • Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer’s instructions tell you. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury. LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) Your vehicle’s second row seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle. All three second row seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCHcompatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to the next section for typical installation instructions. Second Row Seat Left Side THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Second Row Seat Right Side Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system. The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back, and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each second row seating position located on the back of the seat. Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE anchorages. Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then attach the tether strap to the anchorage located on the back of the seat, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint and, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle. WARNING! Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The second and third row seats have either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor, it will have a distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙ earlier in this section. 2 Second Row Seat Tether Anchors Child Restraints in Third Row Seating (If Equipped) For vehicles equipped with third row split bench (60/40) seating, the tether strap anchorage is located on the seat back behind the center seating position. The hooks in the rear floor are NOT designed to withstand the forces that may occur during a crash. 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system secured in a rear seating position. Child Restraint Tether Anchor There are tether strap anchorages behind each seating position in the second row and behind the center seating position in the case of the third row seat (60/40) split bench, if equipped. To install child restraint tether follow these instructions. 1. Place the child restraint in the center seating position of the third row of seats. Third Row Seat Tether Anchor 2. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two headrest posts. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor located on the seat back and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Follow the instructions for Child Restraint Tether Anchor in this section. See your dealer for help if necessary. Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality, energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED. 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the break-in and is not an indication of difficulty. SAFETY TIPS Exhaust System WARNING! Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an extremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless. To avoid inhaling these gases, the following precautions should be observed: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for more than a short period. If so, adjust your climate control system to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the controls in any position except OFF or RECIRC. • The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system; exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace or adjust as required. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Heater Defroster Ducts Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation. Check for proper air flow through all defroster ducts. If there are any question regarding the operation of your heater defroster ducts, have the system checked by an authorized dealer Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.) or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt. Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If there is a problem with the airbag light the seatbelt light will flash. Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure. 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lights Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .80 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 ▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 ▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .81 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .82 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 3 ▫ Automatic Dimming Driver’s Exterior Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 ▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 ▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ▫ Third Row Seat Bench — If Equipped . . . . . . . 120 ▫ Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 108 ▫ Third Row 60/40 Folding — If Equipped . . . . 123 ▫ Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners . . . . . . . . . . 109 䡵 Driver Memory System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 125 ▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . 126 ▫ Adjustable Head Restraints — All Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ 8 - Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . 111 ▫ 4 - Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ▫ Second Row Bucket Seats — Fold And Tumble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ▫ Second Row 40/20/40 Seat — Fold And Tumble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ▫ To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory . . 127 ▫ Self-Limiting Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control . . . . 128 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 ▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 ▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ▫ Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . 133 䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 142 ▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights . . . . . 134 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 ▫ Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . 134 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ▫ Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 䡵 Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 146 ▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 䡵 Overhead Console With Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . . 151 䡵 Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . 141 3 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Dome/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ▫ Express Open Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 ▫ Compass/Temperature Button . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 160 ▫ Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 ▫ 115V Inverter Outlet – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 170 ▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 164 ▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off (Battery Fed Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 ▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 䡵 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 ▫ Erasing HomeLink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ▫ Front Floor Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 ▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button . . . 165 ▫ Rear Floor Console Features – If Equipped . . . 175 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 䡵 Factory Installed Roof Luggage Rack . . . . . . . . . 176 䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 䡵 Cargo Management System—If Equipped . . . . . . 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror. Day/Night Mirror Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward rear of truck). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward windshield). 3 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated. This option also controls the driver side mirror when it is equipped with auto dimming glass. Automatic Dimming Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Electric Remote-Control Mirrors The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver’s door trim panel. 3 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. Remote Control Mirrors Switch 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror. Mirror Directions To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move. When finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror. Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Automatic Dimming Driver’s Exterior Mirror — If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying light glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside mirror and can be turned off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror. Lighted Vanity Mirror Heated Mirrors — If Equipped Heated mirrors are automatically activated when you depress the rear window defroster switch located on the instrument panel. The light will illuminate to indicate that the heating elements are ON. Turning Off the rear window defroster or the ignition will deactivate the heated mirrors. HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — IF EQUIPPED UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect™ system. 3 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation. The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped). The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details. The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™ system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped. The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on certain radios. UConnect™ Switches The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Operations Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™ system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu structure. Voice commands are required after most UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options. 3 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another prompt. • For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then ⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙ • For each feature explanation in this section, only the combined form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command, when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands: ⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you. Voice Command Tree Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section. Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help. To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror. Cancel Command At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone. NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have: NOTE: • www.chrysler.com/uconnect • www.dodge.com/uconnect • www.jeep.com/uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect™ System pairing instructions: • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Setup Phone Pairing⬙ and follow the audible prompts. • When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts. • You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number, which you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process. • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name. 3 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time, only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™ system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙). Call/Dial by Saying a Number • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Dial.⬙ • System will prompt you to say the number you want call. • For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ • The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Call/Dial by Saying a Name Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook • Press the “Phone” button to begin. NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say “Dial” or Call.⬙ • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙ • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the phonebook. • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙ • The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios. • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., ⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired. • When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding. 3 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu. • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit. The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. • When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing. Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion. • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙ • Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit. After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu. ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion. • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙ • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙ • After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will ask you which designation you wish to delete, home, work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish to delete. • Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted. After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted. Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙ • The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. 3 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙ • The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the phonebook entries. • To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired name, and then say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point. • The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call. • The selected number will be dialed. Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have. Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it. Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call.⬙ Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the ⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep. Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one time. 3 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Conference Call When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call. Redial Three-Way Calling To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call. • The UConnect™ system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system. Call Termination To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’ button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. • After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone. • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Redial.⬙ Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 • After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect™ system to the mobile phone. • An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off. UConnect™ System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect™ system is using, • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to (English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped). • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection. After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language. NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages. Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area. If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system is operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows: • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. 3 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA. NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area. The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly. Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system. Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance, • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Towing Assistance.⬙ NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Paging To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time-out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect™ system. Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working with Automated Systems.⬙ Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system. You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging service or automated customer service. Some services require immediate response selection, in some instances, that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system. When calling a number with your UConnect™ system that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager. Barge In - Overriding Prompts The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately. For example, if a prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt. 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™ system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it. Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc. Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition. NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Mute/Un-mute (Mute off) When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the UConnect™ system: Information Service When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc. related information. • Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button. Advanced Phone Connectivity • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙ Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™ system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙ In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system: • Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Mute-off.⬙ Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙ with one electronic device at a time. 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user’s manual. Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system that you want to use it with. List Paired Cellular Phone Names • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup Phone pairing”. • When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙ • The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’ button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone. • You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select. • The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately with in 30 feet) the vehicle. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙ • At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the prompts. • You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete. Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™ System For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training mode, follow one of the two procedures: From outside the UConnect mode (e.g. from radio mode) • Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5 seconds until the session begins, or • Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. To restore the Voice recognition system to factory default settings, enter the Voice Training session using the above procedure and follow the prompts. 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Recognition (VR) • Always wait for the beep before speaking. • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet away from you. • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period. • Performance is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise, • smooth road surface, • fully closed windows, • dry weather condition. • Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some. • When navigating through an automated system, such as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙ • Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended. • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect™ phonebook. • UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is optimized for the voice of the person who stored the name in the phonebook. • You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙ UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 • Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the UConnect™ system. Far End Audio Performance • Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. • Audio quality is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise, • smooth road surface, • fully closed windows, and • dry weather condition. • Operation from driver seat. Bluetooth Communication Link Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode. Power-Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least five (5) seconds prior to using the system. 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Primary zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star (*) plus (+) pound (#) add location all Voice Commands Alternate(s) call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial edit emergency English erase all Espanol Fancais help home language list names list phones 3 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mobile mute mute off new entry no pager pair a phone phone pairing phonebook previous record again redial return to main menu select phone send set up towing assistance transfer call try again voice training work yes pairing phone book return or main menu select phone settings or phone set up SEATS Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked. Manual Seat Adjuster Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners The bucket seats are equipped with recliners. The reclining mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right side of the passenger’s seat and the left side of the driver seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback is locked. 3 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If Equipped The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located on the right side of the driver seat and on the left side of the passenger’s seat. Moving the lumbar control lever fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support. Lumbar Support Adjustment Lever Adjustable Head Restraints — All Seating Positions Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical, at least to the level of the ears. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 To lower the head restraint, depress the release button located at the base of the head restraint and push down on the head restraint. 8 - Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped The driver power seat switches are located on the left side of the driver seat lower side trim. The bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment. Head Restraint Adjustment Power Seat Switch Location 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 - Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on the right side of the passenger seat lower side trim. The bottom switch controls forward/rearward adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment. NOTE: The 4 - way seat does not have an up/down adjustment. Heated Seats — If Equipped This feature heats the driver, front passenger and second row seats. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls. Front Heated Seat Switches The front heated seat system allows the driver and front passenger to select from two different levels of supplemental electrical seat heating, or no seat heating to suit their individual comfort requirements. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 With the ignition switch in the RUN position, depressing the heated seat switch rocker to its momentary high or low position provides power to the heated seat element and maintains the requested temperature setting. If the heated seat switch is depressed to a different position (low or high) than the currently selected state, the requested temperature setting will change to a new selection. If the heated seat switch is depressed a second time to the same position as the currently selected state, the seat heater will turn off. The controls for the second row heated seats are located on the center console between the second row seats. 3 Rear Heated Seats Switches Each heated seat switch has two settings (HI and LOW). Press the switch once to obtain high heat level, then press the switch again to obtain low heat level. Pressing the switch a third time will turn the heated seats off. If you do not purposefully turn the switch off, the seat heating level will automatically change to the next lower level, or 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE off. Both of the indicators on identifies High heat level. The lower indicator on only, identifies Low heat level. WARNING! NOTE: The high heat setting will operate for approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, the system will automatically transition to the low heat setting. The low heat setting will operate for 30 minutes, then the system will turn off. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. If the low heat setting is initially selected, the system will operate for 30 minutes and then turn off. If the indicator lamp on the heated seat switch does not light, an indicator blinks when the switch is depressed or if the heated seats do not operate, the system should be serviced by a qualified technician. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Second Row Bucket Seats — Fold and Tumble Second row bucket seats have seatback recliners on both seating positions. Raising the lever allows the seatback to be reclined an additional 11 degrees. 3. Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the outboard side of the seat and push the seatback forward. The second row bucket seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy access to the third seat or rear cargo area. 3 To fold and tumble the seat, follow these steps: 1. Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the seat. 2. Lower the head restraint to its full downward position. Folding the Setaback 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4. Pull up on the release handle and lift to tumble the seat fully forward. If the seat contacts the rear of the front seat, move the front seat forward. To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the seatback release lever and pull the seatback up to return it to its full upright position. To fold and tumble the 2nd row seats from the 3rd row, fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the seatback. Continue lifting the lever to release the floor latches to tumble the seat. Tumbling the Seat Forward UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING! In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched. Tumble Lever Second Row 40/20/40 Seat — Fold and Tumble The 40/20/40 seat configuration is standard on all models. This seat is equipped with a unique fold-and-tumble feature. The 40% seatbacks have spring loaded hinges which assist with the folding of the seatbacks. 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Second row leather seats have seatback recliners at the 40% seating positions. Raising the lever allows the seatback to be reclined an additional 11 degrees. be folded into the down position for use as a cargo floor, or the seat can now be tumbled forward to allow access to the rear of the vehicle. To fold the 20% seatback, pull the strap forward to release the seatback. Fold the seatback down for use as an armrest or to carry cargo. When returning the seatback to the upright position, push the seatback rearward to latch the seatback. Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position. WARNING! Fold, Tumble, and Recline Lever To Fold the 40% seatbacks fully raise the lever on the side of the seat to release the seatback. The seatback can now The 20% seatback contains the center shoulder belt. A 20% seatback that is not fully latched in the upright position will not protect you properly. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 To Tumble the 40% seat, fully raise the lever on the side of the seat to release the floor latches and tumble the seat. WARNING! Do not drive the vehicle with the outer 40% second row seats in the tumbled position. The outer 40% second row seats are only intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury. Fold, Tumble, and Recline Lever 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The seatback must be fully folded into the down position to allow the lever to be raised enough to release the floor latches. To Fold and Tumble the 2nd row 40% seats from the 3rd row, fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the seatback. Continue raising the lever to release the floor latches to tumble the seat. NOTE: The head restraints must be lowered but do not have to be removed to fold and tumble the seats. Third Row Seat Bench — If Equipped Tumble Lever To Fold The Seats Folding the third seat occurs in two stages: First the cushion is lifted and moved forward from the pockets at the front of the cushion. The cushion will rest onto the floor directly behind the second row seat. Second, the top of the back is folded forward and rests onto the cushion. The back will not fold unless the cushion has been folded forward first. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 3 Seat Cushion Pockets Seat Cushion Movement Up And Forward 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The seat belt buckles are hinged to fold with the seat back. WARNING! Rear Seat Folded CAUTION! When loading cargo into the rear of you vehicle with the 3rd row seat folded flat, be careful not to damage the material on the head restraints. Do not sit in the third row seat unless the cushion and back are properly engaged. Proper engagement can be verified by pushing/pulling on the upright seatback. The seatback will not move unless properly engaged. Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row seatback(s) folded or tumbled. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Third Row 60/40 Folding — If Equipped 3 Third Row Seat 40% Seatback Fold Third Row Seat 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Third Row Seat Features Third Row Seat Folded Forward UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed. 3 Third Row Seat Return Pull Strap DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat position, driver’s outside mirror position, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals position, Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) temperature and radio station Your vehicle was delivered with two Remote Keyless Entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can be linked to either memory position. The memory system can accommodate up to two transmitters, each transmitter linked to either of the two memory positions. 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory 5. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the driver’s door. NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button (1 or 2) are pressed, you erase the memory settings for that button and store new settings. 6. Within 5 seconds, press and release memory button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be performed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory positions. 1. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and both side view mirrors to the desired positions. NOTE: Not all motors may be moved at one time. Please refer to the 8-way power seat description. 2. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions. 3. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set). 4. Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) while the ATC is in Auto mode. 7. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the transmitters. 8. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 9. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to memory. NOTE: A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Memory Position Recall NOTE: • The driver’s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall memory positions. • The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory positions. • Not all motors may be moved at one time. Please refer to the 8-way power seat description. To recall the memory settings for driver one, press memory button number 1 on the driver’s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 1. To recall the memory setting for driver two, press memory button number 2 on the driver’s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 2. A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or pressing any one of the power seat buttons, or pressing the adjustable pedals button, or pressing either the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter when not in the ignition switch. When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected. NOTE: A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason. To Disable A Transmitter Linked to Memory 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key. 2. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located on the driver’s door. 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3. Within 10 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter. To disable another transmitter linked to either memory position, repeat steps 1-3 for each transmitter. NOTE: The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to memory is enabled when delivered from the factory. The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to memory can be disabled (or later reenabled) by a qualified DaimlerChrysler representative. Self-Limiting Control To improve vehicle reliability, the memory system includes a self-limiting control for full travel positioning of power seat and Adjustable Pedal movement (all directions). This self-limiting control may however develop an unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is encountered at sometime during usage. One example of such an occurrence may include a box or package obstructing the full rearward movement of the driver’s seat. Once the obstruction is removed, the self-limiting control may be restored to maximum position. The self-limiting control may be restored by first reaching the recently limited or obstructed position, then release and reactivate the same button or buttons. Continued seat travel beyond the obstructed position will indicate the recently encountered self-limitation has been cleared. Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control This additional feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle. The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key is removed from the ignition switch. The seat will move forward approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position. The Easy Exit and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 the seat is positioned rearward enough and no benefit from moving the seat any farther rearward. NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). For details, refer to “EASY EXIT SEAT,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. 3 Hood Release Lever 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Then push the safety latch lever to the left. It is located between the grille and hood opening right of the center. NOTE: Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip before closing hood to prevent damage to grille. WARNING! If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision. Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving. To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 LIGHTS 3 Headlight Switch Headlight Switch Location 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out. This allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery. Interior Lights Dimmer Control Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the second upward detent position, or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob. When a door is open The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the ⬙Parade⬙ mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day. Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for eight minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off. If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8 minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for 8 minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off. NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON. NOTE: While the engine is running, the system will deactivate the Fog Lights and Heated seats if a low battery system voltage is detected. Headlight Delay To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is cycled off while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. The headlights will remain on for 90 seconds. Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch ON then OFF or by turning the ignition ON. NOTE: This feature can be disabled by your authorized dealer. Automatic Headlights — If Equipped Automatic Headlights can be activated by rotating the rotary headlight switch to the symbol “A.” The headlights will turn on when the engine is running and the ambient light sensor indicates that the headlights should be activated. The headlights will turn off if the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or 90 seconds after the ignition is turned to OFF. 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights When the headlight switch is rotated to the first position to the right, the parking lights, taillights, side marker lights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are all turned on. The headlights will turn ON when the switch is rotated to the second position. Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses. Illuminated Entry Headlights turn on for 90 seconds, when the Remote Keyless Entry UNLOCK button is pressed. NOTE: This feature can be activated by your authorized dealer. Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a constant “Lights ON” condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at reduced intensity. If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn off. If the headlights are activated, the Daytime Running Lights feature will transition to the normal headlight operating mode. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Lights-on Reminder If the headlights, parking lights, or courtesy lights are left On, after the ignition is turned Off, a continuous fast chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened. Fog Lights — If Equipped The fog lights are turned ON by placing the headlight rotary control in the parking light, headlight, or Auto position and pressing the fog light button. The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are ON or when the vehicle headlights are ON low beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pressed in, when the headlight switch is rotated to the OFF position, or the high beam is selected. Multifunction Control Lever The multifunction control lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Turn Signals Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or left-hand turn. Fog Light Switch The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE of the front and rear turn signal lights. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is defective. If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system, the arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down. NOTE: If a turn signal has been left on for at least a mile duration, a continuous chime will sound. Turn Signal Lever Turn Signal Auto-Mode Tap the multi-function control lever once and the turn signal (left or right) will flash 3 times, and automatically turn off. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will momentarily allow the high and low beams to energize at the same time. Within one second the headlights will switch to high beams. 3 High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or LOW beam. Dimmer Lever 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wipers Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range. The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km) or less. WARNING! Windshield Wiper Switch The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed. Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 NOTE: Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or Ice from the windshield. NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the ⬙Park⬙ position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers will resume operation. Windshield Washers To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately three wipes, after the wash knob is released. 3 Washer Fluid Switch To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column, pull rearward on the lever below the turn signal control and move the wheel up or down, as desired. Push the lever forward to lock the column firmly in place. Tilt Steering Column Lever WARNING! Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED Adjustment 1. Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10 inches (254 mm) away from the airbag located in the center of the steering wheel. 2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts. 3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left of the steering column near the parking brake release, up to move the pedals toward the driver or down to move the pedals away from the driver. 4. The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is SET. Adjustable Pedals Switch The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to the steering wheel and pedals. 3 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal’s path. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED When engaged, this device takes over accelerator operation at speeds greater than (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine). The controls are mounted on the steering wheel. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 To Activate NOTE: Activating any two speed control switch functions simultaneously (i.e. SET and CANCEL) will cause the speed control system to shut off and will erase the memory. To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the memory. Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates when the system is on. WARNING! To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it. 3 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push and release the RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine). To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the button is released, a new set speed will be established. Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed increase (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by three increments. Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed decrease (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3 times will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the table below (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine). To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Functions Engage Speed Minimun RESUME Speed ACCEL Increase DECEL Decrease Dropout Speed 4.7L 35 mph (56 km/h) 30 mph (50 km/h) 2 mph (3km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h) 30 mph (50 km/h) 5.7L 25 mph (40 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h) To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. speed control will automatically disengage. If this happens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed. NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000 feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded (especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine), the Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions. To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to improve vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out overdrive by pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button located at the end of the gear shifter. 3 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery. REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The manufacturer suggest disabling the Rear Park Assist System when towing a trailer. Refer to Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC) – If Equipped, Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) in section 3 of this Owner Manual. This system is used to help drivers determine if an obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside mirrors. When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 59 inches (150 cm). A warning display above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings indicating the range of the object. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window. The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: Rear Park Assist LED’s 3 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED 1st LED 2nd LED 3rd LED 4th LED 5th LED 6th LED 7th LED 8th LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 59 in. (150 cm) 47 in. (120 cm) 39 in. (100 cm) 31.5 in. (80 cm) 31.5 in. (80 cm) 25.5 in. (65 cm) 25.5 in. (65 cm) 20 in. (50 cm) 20 in. (50 cm) 16 in. (40 cm) 16 in. (40 cm) 6 in. (15 cm) 12 in. (30 cm) NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Red None None None None None None at 12 in. (30 cm) Intermittent at 8 in. (20 cm) Continuous Red UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNING! CAUTION! • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist System. using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. • Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. 3 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly. OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console has the following features: • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system. If “Service Park Assist System” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer. To turn on/off the rear park assist system, refer to the Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) in Section 3 of this Owner Manual. • Courtesy Lights • Garage Door Opener — If Equipped • Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Courtesy/Reading Lights Near the front of the console are two courtesy/reading lights. Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing the recessed area of the corresponding lens. NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will extinguish after 15 minutes. OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED The overhead console contains dome/reading lights, and an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Dome/Reading Lights Located in the overhead console are two dome/reading lights. The dome/reading lights illuminate when a door is opened or when the interior lights are turned on by rotating the dimmer control located on the Headlight Switch. The reading lights are activated by pressing on the recessed area of the corresponding lens. 3 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The dome/reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. Overhead Console Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped Pressing the menu button will change the display to one of the following features: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Trip Functions Pressing the STEP button allows you to scroll through one of the following Trip Function features: • TRIP – Shows the total distance traveled since the last reset. To reset the TRIP function, press and hold the RESET button. • ELAPSED TIME – Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START positions. • UNIT IN US/METRIC – Press the RESET button to toggle between US and METRIC. • AVG. MPG – Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will show dashes for two seconds. Then the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. (Example: If your Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays 18 AVG. MPG and the RESET button is pressed, the previous averaging history will be erased and the display will return to the 18 AVG. MPG, not to 0 AVG. MPG). The display may take several miles for the value to change dependent upon driving habits. • MI TO EMPTY (Distance To Empty) – Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. MI TO EMPTY cannot be reset through the RESET button. NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. • When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will 3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display. • Global Reset – If the RESET button is pressed twice within 2 seconds while in any of the 3 resettable displays (AVG.MPG, ET (ELAPSED TIME) and TRIP) • LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph) • LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph) • DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion) • LOW WASHER FLUID (with a single chime) System Status (EVIC Displays) When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following messages: • SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM (with a single chime) • TURN SIGNALS ON (with a continuous warning chime) • RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT • RKE BATTERY LOW (with a single chime) • PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE – Vehicle Not in Park • OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (with single chime) • LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT • LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT • RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT • SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 • COOLANT LOW • ESP SYSTEM DEACTIVATED • LIFTGATE OPEN Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK. Press and release the menu button until the Personal Settings displays on the EVIC. Use the STEP button to display one of the following: • “LANGUAGE” – When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. Press the RESET button while in this display to select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language. • “AUTO DOOR LOCKS > YES” – When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. • “AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT > YES” – When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. • “RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st” – When DRV DR 1st is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the 3 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “DRV DR 1st ” appears. on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. • “RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST” – When All ALL DR 1ST is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “All DR 1st” appears. • “FLASH LAMPS w/LOCK >YES” – When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. • MEM. RECALL WITH RKE > YES – When ON is selected, pressing the unlock button on the RKE will recall the memory settings for the seat, mirror and radio. • “SOUND HORN W/LOCK > YES” – When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights • “HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY > 0 SEC” – When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the head lamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” appears. NOTE: The head lamp switch must be in the “A” auto mode before this feature will work. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 • HEADLAMPS W /WIPERS > YES – When ON is selected, the headlamps will automatically turn on when the wiper switch is activated. • EASY EXIT SEAT > YES – When ON is selected, and the key is removed from the ignition, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward to allow easy exit. • TILT MIRRORS IN “R” > YES – When On is selected, and the transmission is put in reverse, the outside mirrors will tilt downward. • “KEY OFF POWER DELAY > OFF” – When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.” appears. • “ILLUMINATED APRCH > OFF” – When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears. • PARK ASST. SYSTEM > YES – When YES is selected, the Park Assist System is activated when the vehicle is in Reverse. When No is selected, the Rear Park System is turned off. • “UNIT IN > US/METRIC” – The EVIC, odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “US” or “METRIC” appears. • “COMPASS VARIANCE > 1” – Press the RESET button to change the compass variance setting. Set this to your current location. If you change location, 3 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE change your variance according to your variance on the variance map. Refer to Compass Variance, in this section for additional information. • “COMPASS CALIBRATE > YES” – Press the RESET button to manually calibrate the compass. Refer to Manual Compass Calibration, in this section for additional information. Compass/Temperature Button Pressing the Compass/Temperature button will return the display to the normal compass/ temperature display. NOTE: Temperature accuracy can be effected from heat soak. For best accuracy, the vehicle should be driven at a speed greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for several minutes. Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self-calibrating, which reduces the need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Press the menu button until Personal Settings is displayed. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 3. Press the STEP button until “Calibrate Compass YES” is displayed. 4. Press and release the RESET button to start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display on the compass temperature screen in the EVIC. 3 5. Complete one or more 360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message turns off. The compass will now function normally. Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North. In some areas of the country, the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set using the following procedure: NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is located. Compass Variance Map 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Press the menu button until Personal Settings is displayed. push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries are needed. 3. Press the STEP button until “Compass Variance” is displayed. 4. Press and release RESET button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map. 5. Press and release the compass button to exit. GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED The HomeLink威 Wireless Control System replaces up to three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800– 355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING! WARNING! A moving garage door can cause injury to people and pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety information or assistance. Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. WARNING! Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects. 3 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming HomeLink The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver–interactive display which includes HomeLink system messages. The EVIC display is located in the overhead console. do not repeat step one to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink buttons. NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and the EVIC will display “CLEARING CHANNELS”, do not release the buttons until “CHANNELS CLEARED” is displayed on the EVIC (after approximately 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and 2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. The EVIC will display “CHANNEL X TRAINING”, once the transmitter is programmed the EVIC will display “CHANNEL X TRAINED”. X refers to the desired channel being trained (1,2 or 3). NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Programming⬙ section. 4. Once “CHANNEL X TRAINED” is displayed on the EVIC, release both buttons. Programming is now complete. When the HomeLink button is subsequently pressed, “CHANNEL X TRANSMIT” is displayed on the screen and your device should be activated, (garage door should open). NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat step one. NOTE: If the EVIC display shows “CHANNEL X TRASMIT” (where X is channel 1,2 or 3) but your device does not activate, the device may be equipped with a “rolling code” system. Continue with the following steps five through seven to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener manufactured after 1995). The assistance of a second person may make the following programming steps quicker and easier. 5. Programming a Rolling Code System At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. 3 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 6. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight. 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming. HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat step one. For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515. Canadian Programming/Gate Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Programming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following: 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The EVIC will display “CHANNEL X TRAINING” and then “CHANNEL X TRAINED”.) Proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ step four to complete. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the ⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating. Using HomeLink To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515. Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ note below), follow the step noted: • Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and the EVIC will display “CLEARING CHANNELS”, do not release the buttons until “CHANNELS CLEARED” is displayed on the EVIC (after approximately 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with ⬙Programming⬙ - step 2. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button. 2. The EVIC will display “CHANNEL X TRANSMIT” for 20 seconds and then change to “CHANNEL X TRAINING”. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ step 2 For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515. 3 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Security Garage Door Opener Operation with Security Alarm (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the Security Alarm feature, the operation of the HomeLink feature will be purposely inhibited if the Security Alarm is ⬙Armed⬙. This prevents HomeLink operation due to un-authorized vehicle entry. HomeLink operation will be re-stored when the Security Alarm has been ⬙Disarmed⬙ (pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry key fob). If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the HomeLink buttons, by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instructions in this section.. To erase all previously trained frequencies, press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and the EVIC will display “CLEARING CHANNELS”, do not release the buttons until “CHANNELS CLEARED” is displayed on the EVIC (after approximately 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds. This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. In the event that you are still having programming difficulties, questions, or comments, call toll free 1–800– 355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com for information or assistance. HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls, Inc. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof control is located between the sun visors on the overhead console. Pressing the ⬙open⬙ end of the rocker switch once moves the panel to a comfort stop position short of full opening. Pressing the switch a second time causes the panel to continue moving rearward, up to the full-open position. To close the panel, the ⬙close⬙ end of the switch must be pressed and held. Pressing the “vent” button from a fully closed position, raises the trailing edge of the panel for ventilation. When the panel is venting, pressing the “close” end or the rocker switch returns it to the closed position. Both opening and closing operations in the vent mode occur only while the switch is held. NOTE: The sunroof will continue to operate for ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until the driver door is opened. This feature may be disabled by your authorized dealer. Express Open Feature During the Express Open operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature. To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed forward again. To close fully, hold the switch in the forward position until the glass movement has stopped. The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. 3 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too. Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS This vehicle has three auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters. The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use. As a safety precaution, the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch ON. When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used, it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position. There are two additional 12 V/(20 total Amps for both outlets) power outlets, one located in the storage bin of the center console and another located in the right rear cargo area. These outlets can be reconfigured by the customer to operate only when the ignition is ON (switched battery fed) or with the ignition ON or OFF (battery fed) to allow for cellular telephone charging and or operation while the ignition is off. NOTE: All accessories connected to these outlets should be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge (unless the customer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery feed). 3 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115V Inverter Outlet – If Equipped This vehicle may also be equipped with a 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet on the rear of the front center console. These outlets can power cell phones, electronics and other low power devices. This plug is controlled by a switch located in left lower instrument panel. NOTE: Due to build in overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded. WARNING! To Avoid Serious Injury or Death: • Do not use a 3 — Prong Adaptor. • Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use. • If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure. 115 V Inverter Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF (Battery Fed Configuration) CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers, 115V Inverter Plug vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. 3 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Reconfiguring Power Outlets To reconfigure the outlets, be sure the ignition is OFF before removing the fuse. The reconfigurable fuse location is a special design that allows the fuse to be installed in two different ways. If the fuse is located in the ⬙Upper or Top Position⬙ the outlets will work at all times. If the fuse is located in the ⬙Lower or Bottom Position⬙ the power outlets will only work when the ignition is ON. NOTE: The fuse block is located in the left side kick panel behind a removable cover near the park brake pedal. A fuse puller is attached to the inside surface of the fuse panel cover to aid in removing fuses, if necessary. FLOOR CONSOLE Front Floor Console Features The Floor Console between the driver’s and front passenger’s seat, has the following features: • Miscellaneous storage compartments • Flexible cup holder inserts UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 • Portable phone storage bin • Portable phone cord routing between lid and base on forward edge • 12 Volt reconfigurable power outlet inside storage compartment • Side open armrest lid cupholders and storage bin located in the front of the center console can be accessed by pressing on the access doors. NOTE: In colder temperatures you may experience a slight delay on console doors opening, the console door speed will come back to normal after 1–2 cycles. • Tissue holder & pen holder • Coin slots • Removable CD bin The coin slots are located under the instrument panel center stack. Cup Holders Your vehicle has 8 cupholders. four are located in the center console, two are located in the second row armrest or rear floor console (if equipped), and two are located in the left hand quarter panel for third row occupants. The Cup Holder Doors 3 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Center Console Bin Mat Tab The front storage bin in the center console is equipped with a removable bin mat. This mat can be removed by pulling on the tab located on the front edge of the bin mat. Removing this mat will allow you to retrieve any lost item that are between the bin doors. Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage The console is equipped with a power outlet, portable phone storage bin, and phone cord routing. The phone storage bin can be used when easy access to the phone is needed. Also, the power outlet inside the console compartment can be used to power up the phone while it is UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 being stored in the bin. To use, plug in the portable power recharge cord and place the cord along the opening under the forward portion of the storage bin. Close the console armrest lid and plug the power cord into the phone while resting the phone in the bin. The power outlet may be used for any portable item with a standard 12 volt power outlet adaptor, requiring up to 20 Amps of current. • Tissue holder & pen holder • Second row heated seat switches. • Four slots for DVD’s 3 Rear Floor Console Features – If Equipped The Rear Floor Console located between the second row bucket seat, has the following features: • Miscellaneous storage compartments • Cup holders • Portable phone cord routing on either side, between lid and base • 12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment Rear Floor Console To access the storage bin, lift up on the console door latch. 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE FACTORY INSTALLED ROOF LUGGAGE RACK NOTE: Crossbars are offered by Mopar威 accessories. External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 68 kg (150 lbs.), and should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area. The side rails between the stantions should be used to tie down cargo. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 CAUTION! WARNING! To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately. Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle. Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load. Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle. 3 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM—IF EQUIPPED The cargo management system consists of a removable cargo liner and removable cargo organizer. 1 — Side Cover Latch 2 — Main Cover Latch 3 — Cargo Divider Handles To open the side cover, pull on the cover latch, and attach the cord to the upper cargo net hook. To open the main cover, pull up on the latch, and attach the cord to the rear seat head restraint post. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 To open the Cargo divider, lift up on the cargo divider handles, raising the doors to the full open position. Raise the side panels until they engage into the doors. 1 — Cargo Divider Door 2 — Cargo Divider Side Panel To remove the cargo management system from the vehicle, pull the right hand side of the organizer towards you so that the right pin slides out of the slot in the vehicle. Push the organizer to the right and lift out of the vehicle. 3 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS CONTENTS 䡵 Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 ▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 䡵 Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc) Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 ▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 ▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 ▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 200 ▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 204 ▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 206 4 182 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone, And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES) Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 ▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 208 ▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 ▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 ▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 219 䡵 Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc) Radio With Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 ▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 ▫ REC Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 ▫ Audio Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 䡵 Video Entertainment System (Sales Code XRV) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 ▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 ▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 ▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 ▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ, And RAK Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 183 ▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 ▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 229 ▫ Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 ▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 ▫ Air Conditioning Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 ▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 ▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 ▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 ▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 230 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 䡵 Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 232 ▫ Front Blower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 ▫ Front Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 ▫ Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped . . . . 237 ▫ Rear Window Defrosting And Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 ▫ Automatic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 ▫ Level Of Automatic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 ▫ Manual Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 ▫ Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped . . . 244 4 184 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ▫ Rear Rotary Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . 245 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 ▫ Front Unit To Rear Unit Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ Rear Window Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 185 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 4 186 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Instrument Cluster INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 187 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1. Fuel Gage The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position. 2. Temperature Gage The temperature gage indicates engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gage needle in V6 and V8 engines will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or when towing a trailer. If the needle rises to the “H” mark, stop the vehicle, shift into N (Neutral) increase engine speed for 2-3 minutes. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, seek authorized service immediately. CAUTION! Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator if the engine overheats. The gage pointer will remain near its last reading when the engine is turned off. It will return to a true reading when the engine is restarted. 3. Turn Signal Indicators When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal, check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the 4 188 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS left/right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM vehicle speed greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more than one mile. 7. Fog Light Indicator This light shows when the fog lights are ON. 4. Low Fuel Warning Light This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1/8 of a tank or less. 8. Coolant Temperature Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. For a bulb check, this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shift into N (Neutral) and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3 minutes. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, seek authorized service immediately. 5. High Beam Indicator Indicates that headlights are on high beam. 6. Seat Belt Reminder Light This light comes on for several seconds after the ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled. If this light flashes, it indicates a fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 189 CAUTION! WARNING! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until the light turns off. If the if the light remains on, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. 9. Speedometer Shows the vehicles speed. 10. Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage. The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system. Immediate service should be obtained. 4 190 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 11. Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set. The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on. illuminates and the ABS is switched off. When the voltage is above this value again, the malfunction indicator light should go out and the ABS is operational. If the malfunction indicator light stays illuminated, have the system checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 12. ABS Warning Light This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System which is described elsewhere in this manual. This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for approximately 3 seconds. If this light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. See your authorized dealer immediately. With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also switched off. Both malfunction indicator lights illuminate with the engine running. If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator light 13. Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has become too low. For a bulb check, this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Immediate service should be obtained. 14. Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000). INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 191 15. Gear Selector The electronic gear selector display is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of each position to all other positions. For a good signal the display will place a box around the selected transmission range (PRND21). If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 (no boxes) have the system checked by an authorized dealer. 16. Trip Odometer The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer, press the Odometer/Trip Odometer Button. To reset the Trip Odometer, press and hold the button while in trip mode, until the Trip Odometer resets. Also the cluster will display, replacing the odometer, vehicle warning messages such as: door ajar, gate ajar, low wash, No-fuse, and the outside temperature. The outside temperature will display in the odometer for non-Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles. Pressing the trip odometer reset button toggles the feature back to the odometer. NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), all warnings including door ajar, liftgate open, low washer fluid, will only be displayed in the EVIC display. For additional information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center — If Equipped” in Section 3. 17. Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or 4 192 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined. 18. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedometer area illuminates with the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ also flashes when TCS is active. If the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The “ESP/ TCS Indicator Light” becomes illuminated when the ESP-Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially available caused by lack of engine management or brake thermal model. 19. Transmission Temperature Indicator This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off. 20. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running. If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable, however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 193 on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. 21. BRAKE System Warning Light The red “BRAKE” warning light will come on when the ignition key is first turned on, and stay on briefly as a bulb check. If the bulb does not come on during starting, have the bulb repaired promptly. If the light stays on, it may be an indication that the parking brake has not been released, or there is a low brake fluid level. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake Booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake. If the parking brake is applied, the light will flash when the gear position is out of park for automatic transmissions. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. Operating the vehicle in this condition is dangerous! 22. ESP/BAS Warning Lamp The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 4 194 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS NOTE: • ⬙The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ and the ⬙ESP/ BAS Warning Lamp⬙ come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. • The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively operating. 23. Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system which monitors the emissions and engine control system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 10 seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come on during starting, have the condition investigated promptly. If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 195 24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset. 4 196 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. 25. Airbag Indicator The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition is first turned ON. If the light does not come on when the ignition is first turned on, or the light stays on or comes on while driving, have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer. 26. 4WD Indicator Indicates when transfer case is in 4WD position. 27. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator The SVC 4WD lights will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and will stay on for 2 seconds. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. 28. Cruise Light (Speed Control) This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 197 29. TOW/HAUL The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/ HAUL button has been selected. 30. 4LOW Indicator Indicates transfer case is in 4LOW position. 31. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading. ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position. When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is accurately maintained. On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio only one of the two, time or frequency is displayed. Clock Setting Procedure 1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune / Audio control. 3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune / Audio control to set the minutes. 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio control. 4 198 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately 5 seconds. SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel, press and hold the button until the setting is correct. RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio signals. Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 199 Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude, and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal. AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines and neon signs. FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear, which is the major feature of FM radio. NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature. 4 200 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate. Operating Instructions - Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. REF Radio For your convenience, the volume can be turned down, but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 201 Mode Button (Radio Mode) Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped). SEEK Button (Radio Mode) Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it. MUTE Button (Radio Mode) Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF, or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE feature. NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the MUTE button mutes the microphone. SCAN Button (Radio Mode) Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second time. PSCAN Button (Radio Mode) Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press PSCAN a second time. Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will display for 5 seconds. 4 202 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Clock Setting Procedure 1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/ Audio control. 3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio control. 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds. RW/FF (Radio Mode) Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies. TUNE Control (Radio Mode) Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency. AM/FM Button (Radio Mode) Press the button to select AM or FM Modes. Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones. Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 203 Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers. selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push-button memory. Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers. You may add a second station to each push-button by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push-button twice. Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone, balance, and fade. RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The Push-Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push-button memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode) These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations}. 4 204 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Operation Instructions - CD Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play. The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one. NOTE: • On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF. • If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player. • This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks. SEEK Button (CD Mode) Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection. MUTE Button (CD Mode) Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 205 SCAN Button (CD Mode) Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track. To stop the scan function, press the button a second time. EJECT Button (CD Mode) Press this button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the last selected mode. If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear. TIME Button (CD Mode) Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for 5 seconds. RW/FF (CD Mode) Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner. RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD Mode) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track. Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play. 4 206 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers. The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display. SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK position to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the radio was previously in the AUX mode. SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 207 TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for 5 seconds. Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If Equipped Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)” section of the Owner’s Manual. RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode) No function. Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If Equipped Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s Manual. RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped). 4 208 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate. Operating Instructions - Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. For your convenience, the volume can be turned down, but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON. RAQ Radio INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 209 Mode Button (Radio Mode) Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment System (VES) (if equipped). SEEK Button (Radio Mode) Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it. MUTE Button (Radio Mode) Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the MUTE button mutes the microphone. SCAN Button (Radio Mode) Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second time. MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode) Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). 4 210 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds. Clock Setting Procedure 1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune / Audio control. 3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune / Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio control. 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds. RW/FF (Radio Mode) Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies. TUNE Control (Radio Mode) Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency. AM/FM Button (Radio Mode) Press the button to select AM or FM Modes. Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones. Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 211 Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones. Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers. Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone, balance and fade. RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode) Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information. Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types: Program Type No program type or undefined Adult Hits Alert Alert Classical Classic Rock College Country Emergency Test Foreign Language Information 16 Digit-Character Display None Adult_Hits Alert Alert Classical Classic_Rock College Country Emergency Test Foreign_Language Information 4 212 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies Personality Public Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock Soft Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports Talk Top 40 Weather Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies Personality Public Rhythm_and_Blues Religious_Music Religious_Talk Rock Soft Soft_Rock Soft_R_&_B Sports Talk Top_40 Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode. If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the Push-Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push-button memory. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 213 You may add a second station to each push-button by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12 FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push-button twice. Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed. Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode) These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations}. NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. 4 214 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS CAUTION! to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection. This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers. You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the disc number, the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 215 LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play) Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc. LOAD/ EJECT - Load Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the CD into the player. Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio. Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is reading the disc. LOAD / EJT - Eject Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio, the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout. If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display ⬙INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be displayed. On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. 4 216 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display. RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner. RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track. TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone, Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode. Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature. AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Switches the Radio to the Radio mode. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play. Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 217 Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions. Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW. Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. The radio uses the following limits for file systems: • Maximum number of directory levels: 15 • Maximum number of files: 255 • Maximum number of folders: 100 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a 3-character extension) • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a 3-character extension) Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times. 4 218 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file. When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates. MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency (kHz) MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32 MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16 Bit rate (kbps) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8 ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 219 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files. Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following: • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs • Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc. Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio Play) SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file. LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) LOAD/ EJECT - Load Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the CD into the player. Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc is loading. 4 220 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS LOAD / EJECT - Eject Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc. If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio, the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout. If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display ⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode. MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The radio scrolls through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available). Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode. Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file. RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection. TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone, Balance, and Fade. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 221 AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Switches back to Radio mode. RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing this button plays files randomly. SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure. Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders. Press the TUNE control to select a folder. Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject. Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If Equipped) Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s Manual. Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If Equipped) Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s Manual. Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES威) (If Equipped) Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威) Guide. 4 222 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD changer with MP3 capability. Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instructions. Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If Equipped) Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instructions. REC Setting the Clock REC Radio Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning System-based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection GPS Clock The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 223 the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set. 1. At the Main Menu screen, highlight “Clock Setup” and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the TIME button on the unit’s faceplate. The Clock Setup screen appears. 2. To show the GPS clock, select “Displayed Clock: GPS Clock” and press ENTER. 3. To adjust the time zone, Select “Time Zone” and press ENTER. Select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER. 4. To turn daylight savings on or off, select “Daylight Savings” and press ENTER. Select “On” or “Off” and press ENTER. 5. Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode. Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved. 4 224 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS User Defined Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the system clock, you can manually adjust the time by choosing the “User Defined Clock” option. 1. At the Clock Setup screen highlight “Displayed Clock: User Defined Clock”. 2. To increase the clock by hours, make sure “HR +” is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another hour. You will see on the “User Defined Time” display the number of hours you have increased the clock by. 3. To decrease the clock by one hour, use the Select Encoder to highlight the “-” sign. Press ENTER. Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour. 4. To increase the clock by minutes, make sure “MIN +” is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another minute. 5. To decrease the clock by minutes, use the Select Encoder to highlight the “-“ sign. Press ENTER. Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute. 6. Select “DONE” to exit from the clock setting mode. Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 225 Audio Clock Display Select this option to change the size of the clock on the audio screens. 3. To switch the clock to the small clock, quickly press TIME again. 1. When you are at an audio screen, quickly press the TIME button on the navigation faceplate. 2. In this example the large clock appears on the screen. 4 4. To toggle back to the large clock, simply press TIME. 226 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE XRV) — IF EQUIPPED The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display) screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headsets. The system is located in the headliner behind the front row seat. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for detailed operating instructions. System Activation SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID). NOTE: Your vehicle’s radio must be on and in satellite mode when the activation process takes place. To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system: 2. Credit card information. 3. Your Vehicle Identification Number. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 227 Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps: ESN/SID Access With REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit ESN/SID number will display. Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits. Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID digits display. The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits display. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed. ESN/SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will display. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed. ESN/SID Access With REC Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual. With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simultaneously until the 12 digits of the ESN/SID appear on the screen. 4 228 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode. Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. These radios will also display the current station name and program type. For more information, such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode. Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released. Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will appear in the display between each channel change. Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search. NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-5397474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 229 Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio. Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if equipped) Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio. PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ When the desired program type is obtained, press the ⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙ button a second time to stop the search. NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button, while performing a music type scan, will change the channel by one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory button during a music type scan, will call up the memory channel and stop the search. PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙ button within five seconds. The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected. Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna. 4 230 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons. • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle. • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes. • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception. • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage. REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 231 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume. The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD. The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center. The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode. Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons. CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track, three times, it will play the third, etc. The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This button does not function for all other radios. 4 232 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the following precautions: 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners, or antistatic sprays. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high. NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service. RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 233 CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Control Air Conditioning Operation To turn the air conditioning On or Off perform the following steps: • Position the mode control button to the desired airflow setting. • Set the front blower control to any desired speed. • Press the Snowflake (A/C) button which is located to the right of the temperature control slide. An indicator light on the Snowflake (A/C) button shows that the air conditioning is On. • Press the Snowflake (A/C) button a second time to turn the air conditioning Off. The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. The following describes its operation: NOTE: The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in 4 234 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS engine speed or power may be noticed when the compressor cycles. This is a normal occurrence since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and improve fuel economy. Front Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution. Front Blower Control The Front Blower controls the amount of air delivered to the passenger compartment. There are four blower speeds. The fan speed increases as you turn the control clockwise. When the front blower control is turned to OFF, the blower will be turned off and the system will be positioned in recirculation mode. NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots and give an even blend of both modes. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 235 Recirculation Mode (Panel or Bi-Level) Select either the Panel or Bi-Level mode positions when the outside air contains smoke, odors, high humidity, or if rapid cooling of the interior is desired. This feature allows for recirculation of interior air only, when either of these positions are selected. Air flows through the panel outlets or panel and floor outlets in these modes. Panel Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow. Bi-Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor. NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions. Heat (Floor) Outside air flows primarily through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel. A small amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Mix Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlet. 4 236 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Defrost Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlet located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. Temperature Control The temperature of the air is controlled by a slide located on the top center of the control panel. Move the slide left or right to change the temperature. The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 237 Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped Rotating this knob left to the “REAR CONTROL” position allows the passengers in the second and third row seats to control the blower speed and temperature by means of the rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as described under “Rear Zone Control.” Rotating this knob to the “OFF” position, turns off the rear climate controls. Rotating this knob to the right of the “OFF” position allows the Driver and front passenger to control the rear blower speed, and the rear temperature using the front temperature slide. The mode, front or rear, is always controlled by the front mode control. For example: Panel mode on the front control will give you air from the outlets in the headliner in the rear. Floor mode in the front will give you floor in the rear. Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window Washer/Wiper See the “Rear Window Features” section of this book. 4 238 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped The control can be turned on by pressing the POWER knob. When the control is turned on, it will be in the last mode prior to being turned off. Pressing the POWER knob again will turn off the control. The control can also be turned on by pressing any button and it will display the corresponding operation mode for that button. Automatic Control The ATC system can maintain a steady comfort level in various weather conditions with a simple operation: • Select your desired temperature setting by pressing the + or - side of the TEMP rocker switches. A digital temperature setting for driver and passenger will be displayed. The ATC system uses an infrared wensor INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 239 located in the overhead console to measure the temperature of the driver and passengers. Based on the sensor input, the system will automatically ocntrol comfort by varying the temperature, fan speed, and mode. This maintains a comfortable temperature, even under changing conditions. It is important that objects are not blocking the infrared sensor. It is also important that objects are not used that may scratch or damage it in any way. Level Of Automatic Control 72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person, however, this may vary. NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation. It is not necessary to move the temperature setting for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. NOTE: In cold weather, the fan will not turn on in AUTO mode until the engine coolant has warmed up sufficiently. This is indicated by the WARM UP DELAY message on the display. NOTE: The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by selecting the US/M customer programmable feature. Refer to the ⬙Overhead Console-Customer Programmable Features.⬙ The mode will also be shown in the display and will change as required during automatic operation. NOTE: The system can be put into recirculate mode without affecting ATC operation. This will prevent outside air from entering the vehicle. Use this mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust. 4 240 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Manual Control (ATC) You also may choose to customize your comfort by selecting the fan speed and mode manually. Turning the fan speed knob or any mode button places the system into manual operation. While in manual operation there are six fan speeds available and the choice of any mode. The airflow temperature is adjusted automatically to maintain the desired comfort level. You can adjust the temperature by pressing the + or - TEMP rocker switches. FAN Control Use this knob to regulate the amount of air delivered through the system in any mode you select. Rotation of the knob to increase (clockwise) or decrease (counterclockwise) fan speed. Air Conditioning Operation Press this button to enable the air conditioning system. Compressor operation is automatic when you press the AUTO button and no snowflake is shown. A snowflake indicates that the A/C system is enabled. The snowflake will not be displayed in AUTO mode even though the A/C system is enabled. The compressor may operate at any temperature above 32°F (0°C). NOTE: The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the compressor cycles. This is a normal occurrence since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and improve fuel economy. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 241 Recirculate Button Press this button to recirculate the air inside the vehicle. Outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle. Use this mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, dust or when rapid cooling of the interior is required. Manual control of Recirculation is possible only in Panel, Floor, and Bi-Level modes. It will not operate in Mix, or Defrost modes. The recirculation symbol will flash three times indicating recirculation is not available in these modes. NOTE: If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press the recirculate button to return to outside air. Some conditions will cause captured interior air to fog windows when in recirculate mode. Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow. Floor (Heat) Air flows primarily through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel. A small amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Mix Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlets. 4 242 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Bi-Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor. NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions. Defrost Outside air is directed to the windshield through the defroster outlet located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if the A/C snowflake button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. Rear Temperature Control (ATC) The “REAR” button cycles through the following modes: Rear Control from Front This allows the driver or passenger to control the rear blower speeds rotating the POWER / FAN knob and the rear temperature using the pass/rear TEMP +/- rocker switch. While in this mode, pressing the POWER/FAN knob will turn the rear system off. Pressing the POWER/ FAN knob will turn the rear system back on. NOTE: The display will show a ⬙REAR⬙ fan speed graph and a ⬙REAR⬙ digital temp setting. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 243 CONTROL IN REAR This allows the passengers in the second row seats to control the blower speed and temperature by means of the rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as described under the ⬙Rear Zone Climate Control.⬙ NOTE: The front display will show “CONTROL IN REAR.” REAR OFF This turns the rear system off. The control will return to the front system display after approximately 5 seconds if no buttons are pushed while in one of the rear system displays. You may also return to the front system display sooner by pushing any button except the POWER/FAN knob, the rear button, the driver/passenger temp rocker buttons. NOTE: The display will show “REAR OFF.” REAR AUTO This mode places the rear system in automatic temperature control. Rear temperature can be set as desired (72 recommended for average person) and will be displayed digitally on the front control when in rear mode. Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window Washer/Wiper See the “Rear Window Features” section of this book. 4 244 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped Headliner air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vane knobs on the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. The rear compartment control uses two rotary knobs: one for the temperature control and the other for the fan speed control. The mode for the rear air conditioning and heating system is always controlled by the front control unit. Fan and temperature can be controlled from the front control unit or the rear control unit. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 245 Rear Rotary Blower Control The second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed, only when the front control unit is in the “REAR CONTROL” position or CONTROL IN REAR⬙ for ATC.⬙ The rear blower switch has an “Off” position and a range of blower speeds. Rotating the rear blower control clockwise will increase the blower speed. Rear Rotary Temperature Control The second row seat occupants have contorl of the rear temperature only when the front control unit is in the ⬙REAR CONTROL⬙ position. To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, rotate the temperature control knob to the right or left. The blue area indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures. NOTE: For best operation, make sure that ventilation grilles located in the rear storage area are not obstructed by stowed articles. 4 246 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Front Unit to Rear Unit Chart If the Front Control is selected Panel Bi-Level Floor Mix Defrost Rear Airflow will come from Headliner Headliner Floor Floor Floor Operating Tips Fast Cooldown For a fast cooldown, set the blower fan to the highest setting, set the mode control to the panel fresh position, press the snowflake button to turn on the air conditioning, and drive with the windows open for the first few minutes. Once the hot air has been expelled, close the windows and set the mode selector to the Recirculation panel or Recirculation Bi-level position. When a comfortable condition has been reached, choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control and blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort. For high humidity conditions it may be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to maintain comfort. Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort. As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode position on the control. Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 247 Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows. Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging. Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 % concentration is recommended. Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months, make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions. This will also prevent snow ingestion into the ducts. 4 248 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Operating Tips Chart INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 249 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper/Washer 4 A rotating switch located on the climate control panel turns the rear wiper On or Off. Pressing the rotating switch inward activates the rear window washer. Rotating the switch will enable one of five intermittent delay times for the rear wiper. The delay times range from 20 to 1 second. 250 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will resume operation. Rear Window Defrosting A push-button type switch is located in the climate control panel. Press the switch and the rear window defroster and electric remote control heated mirrors (if equipped) will turn On. An amber indicator on the push-button will light when the defroster is turned On. An symbol will be displayed when the defroster is turned on with an ATC control. Push again to turn Off prior to time-out. The defroster will automatically turn Off after fifteen minutes. For ten more minutes of operation, push the button again. To prevent excessive battery drain, use the defroster only when the engine is operating. CAUTION! Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Also, keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements. STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 ▫ Shifting Procedure - NV 144 Transfer Case . . . 266 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 ▫ NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating Information / Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 ▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 䡵 Engine Block Heater – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 257 䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 ▫ NV 144 Transfer Case Operating Information/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 ▫ Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . 275 䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 5 252 STARTING AND OPERATING 䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 ▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 ▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 ▫ TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 ▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 ▫ ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) . . . . . . . . . . 282 ▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 301 ▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 283 ▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 302 䡵 Multi Displacement System (MDS) - 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 䡵 Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 292 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 293 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 ▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 䡵 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 STARTING AND OPERATING 253 䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 ▫ Base System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 䡵 Flexible Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 ▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 ▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 ▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . 320 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 ▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 ▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 ▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 ▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 5 254 STARTING AND OPERATING 䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 ▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 ▫ Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 䡵 Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 ▫ Dodge Durango Or Chrysler Aspen Models . . 338 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 339 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 ▫ Recreational Towing 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . 339 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 ▫ Recreational Towing 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . 339 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 䡵 Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 STARTING AND OPERATING 255 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. WARNING! Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries. WARNING! Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death. Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range. Normal Starting Normal Starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal. Tip Start Feature Your vehicle has a “Tip Start” starting system. With “Tip Start” the driver does not need to hold the key in the 5 256 STARTING AND OPERATING ’Start’ position until the vehicle starts, but can release the key (still in the ignition) and the vehicle will continue through the start cycle. • Turn the ignition key to the START position, until the start motor engages. • Release the key (still in the ignition) and the starter will continue through the start cycle until the vehicle starts or for 5 seconds (whichever comes first). If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. WARNING! Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury. STARTING AND OPERATING 257 WARNING! Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully. If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly. If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated. After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled on fuel injected engines and will decrease as the engine warms up. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER – IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three wire extension cord. 5 258 STARTING AND OPERATING The 4.7L engine block heater cord is located at the front of the engine compartment near the radiator cap. The 5.7L engine block heater cord is located on the left side of the engine compartment and rearward of the power distribution center. WARNING! Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear selected. The selector lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column. To drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the desired drive position. Pull selector lever toward you when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or when shifting out of Park. Brake/Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed. This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK. Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or Neutral position into another gear range. STARTING AND OPERATING 259 “P” Park Supplements parking brake by locking the transmission. Engine can be started in this range. Never use Park while vehicle is in motion. Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first, then place selector in Park position. WARNING! Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. WARNING! Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to move the gearshift lever back and forth without first pulling the lever toward you, after you have set it in P (Park). Make sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle. 5 260 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. “R” Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. “N” Neutral Shift to Neutral when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle. NOTE: Towing the vehicle (except as specified under Towing A Disabled Vehicle), coasting, or otherwise driving the vehicle while in N (Neutral) can cause severe transmission damage “D” Drive For most city and highway driving. “2” Second For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain roads where more precise speed control is desirable. Use it also when climbing long grades, and for engine braking when descending moderately steep grades. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 miles per hour (72 km/h) in this range. STARTING AND OPERATING 261 “1” First For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at low speeds 25 mph (40 km/h) or less when going down hill. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range. Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed (Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are present: • the transmission selector is in Drive; • the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature; • vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48 km/h); • the “TOW/HAUL” switch has not been activated; • transmission has reached normal operating temperature. NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature. Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch, later in this section. If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After cooldown, the transmission will resume normal operation. 5 262 STARTING AND OPERATING The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h). When To Use “TOW/HAUL” Mode performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in “TOW/HAUL” mode, 5th gear (if equipped) is disabled and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are modified. Shifts into Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed during steady cruise (for improved fuel economy) and automatic closed-throttle downshifts to 3rd gear (for improved braking) will occur during steady braking. The “TOW/HAUL” light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation. If the “TOW/HAUL” mode is desired, the button must be pressed each time the engine is started. When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will improve Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included in all automatic transmissions. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at STARTING AND OPERATING 263 light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in Overdrive and in Drive. the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission. This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into any other gear position. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Pressing the⬙TOW/HAUL⬙ button will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. NV 144 Transfer Case Operating Information/Precautions The NV 144 is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the Four-Wheel-Drive (4WD) Control Switch, which is located on the instrument panel. NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to The NV 144 transfer case is designed to be driven in for 4WD for normal street and highway conditions (all road surfaces roads). The NV 144 transfer case provides 2 mode positions: Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) and 4-Wheel-Drive Lock (4WD LOCK). 5 264 STARTING AND OPERATING When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD LOCK position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the 4WD LOCK position - see Shifting Procedure section for specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK position is designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster, and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. If there are no indicator lights on or flashing the transfer case position is Four-Wheel Drive (4WD). The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. WARNING! Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the ⴖService 4WDⴖ light is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury. NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV 144 transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the STARTING AND OPERATING 265 shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case. Proper operation of four-wheel-drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case. Because four-wheel-drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the following information: 4WD Normal Four-Wheel-Drive High Range - Employs interaxle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds. All road surfaces. 4WD LOCK Four-Wheel-Drive Lock (4WD LOCK)- Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. 5 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Shifting Procedure - NV 144 Transfer Case NOTE: Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or excessive vehicle loading. NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry a selection, turn the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5) seconds, and retry the shift. 4WD to 4WD LOCK or 4WD LOCK to 4WD With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUNNING, rotate the transfer case switch, located on the instrument panel to the desired position. NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between 4WD/4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation the position indicator light will continue to flash. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to 13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning. NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. STARTING AND OPERATING 267 If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating Information / Precautions The NV 244 Generation II is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch, which is located on the instrument panel. The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides 4 mode positions - Normal four-wheel-drive (4WD) high range, four-wheel-drive lock (4WD LOCK), four-wheel-drive low (4WD LOW) range, and neutral (N). This transfer case is equipped with an inter-axle differential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal all-wheel-drive position (4WD) at all times on any given road surface, including dry hard surfaced roads. The 4WD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds. This eliminates driveline binding and component wear normally associated with driving the vehicle in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads. This feature provides the safety, security, and convenience of operating in all-wheel drive at all times regardless of road conditions. When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together through the transfer case inter-axle differential and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to these positions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. 5 268 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is to be used for recreational towing only. See Recreational Towing section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral (N). Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster. If there are no indicator lights on or flashing the transfer case position is Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection (4WD ⇔ 4WD LOCK). The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. WARNING! Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the ⴖService 4WDⴖ light is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury. NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV 244 Generation II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case. STARTING AND OPERATING 269 When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 40 km/h (25 mph). Proper operation of four-wheel-drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case. Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the following information: 5 270 STARTING AND OPERATING 4WD Normal Four-Wheel-Drive High Range - Employs interaxle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds. All road surfaces. 4WD LOCK Four-Wheel-Drive Lock (4WD LOCK)- Locks the transfer case inter-axle differential. Forces front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. 4WD LOW Four-Wheel-Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)- Low speed 4 wheel drive. Locks the transfer case inter-axle differential. Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). N Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more information. STARTING AND OPERATING 271 Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to 13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning. NOTE: Delayed shifting out of the 4WD LOCK position may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or excessive loading. NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants. Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES: NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between 4WD/ 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation a position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the Preferred Procedure 1. With the engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 5 272 STARTING AND OPERATING 3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position. 4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing, shift the transmission back into gear. Alternate Procedure 1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop. 2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position. 4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing, shift the transmission back into gear. NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry the selection, turn the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5) seconds, and retry the shift. DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy. 2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles. STARTING AND OPERATING 273 3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. PARKING BRAKE The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle. 5 Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear-shift lever is in PARK position. When parking on a hill you should apply the Parking Brake before placing the gear shift lever in PARK; otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of PARK. 274 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: The instrument cluster brake warning light indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle. When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake should be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or vehicle may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in Park. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 275 BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason, (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly increased over that required with the power system operating. surfaces. All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer. If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake Warning Lamp and the ABS Lamp during brake use. Significant over or under inflation of tires, or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness. Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery WARNING! The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low-speed selftest at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow. This is normal. The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal. 5 276 STARTING AND OPERATING At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation. Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure results in optimal braking power while maintaining the ability to steer the vehicle. In the case of an emergency brake maneuver, keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this manner only can the ABS be most effective. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pedal pressure because of the increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. WARNING! Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be done by qualified professionals. WARNING! Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. STARTING AND OPERATING 277 WARNING! • Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the Anti-lock Brake system, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system. Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the system is functioning properly. POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. 5 278 STARTING AND OPERATING If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system. CAUTION! Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and does not in any way damage the steering system. Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur. WARNING! STARTING AND OPERATING 279 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), BAS (Brake Assist System), TCS (Traction Control System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation), ESP (Electronic Stability Program) and TSC (Trailer Sway Control). All six systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions, and are commonly referred to as ESP. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS. NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers. WARNING! • Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. 5 280 STARTING AND OPERATING BAS (Brake Assist System) applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. ESP Off Switch Location The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. The system STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING! • BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. TCS (Traction Control System) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability Program)” in this Section of this manual. This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non-slipping wheels to provide optimal forward traction. 5 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. WARNING! Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. • ERM can not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. • The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. STARTING AND OPERATING 283 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. ESP/TCS Indicator Light The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the TCS or ESP system becomes active. It will also flash once a swaying trailer is detected and the TSC (Trailer Sway Control) system activates. If the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. 5 284 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! • ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. • ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. • The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. The ESP system has 2 available operating modes. 4WD/4WD LOCK or 2WD Models ON This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOCK and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOW or neutral back to 4WD LOCK, the ESP system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most all driving situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons as noted below. This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the “ESP OFF” Control Switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine management portion of ESP has been desensitized, the thresholds for ESP activation are raised, and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be Partial Off illuminated. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel STARTING AND OPERATING 285 conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction. TSC (Trailer Sway Control) is not available when the system is in the ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode. To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the “ESP-Control OFF” Control Switch. This will restore the normal “ON” mode of operation. ESP always operates under braking, even with the switch in the OFF-position. WARNING! In the Partial Off mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressing the ESP Control Switch. Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESP on by momentarily depressing the “ESP Control Switch”. This may be done with the vehicle is in motion. 4WD LOW Range Partial Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOCK or neutral to 4WD LOW, the ESP system will be in this mode. In 4WD LOW, ESP function is desensitized until the vehicle reaches a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h). At 30 mph (48 km/h) the normal ESP stability function returns and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light” turns off. When the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph (40 km/h) the ESP system goes back to Partial Off. ESP is desensitized at low vehicle speeds in 4WD LOW so that it will not interfere 5 286 STARTING AND OPERATING with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h). The ABS is in a special Off-Road mode that allows wheels to lock at lower speeds if gravel is detected to shorten stopping distances. NOTE: When the vehicle is in 4WD LOW, a feature of the ESP system remains active whether the ESP is on or off. This feature functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across an axle. If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. WARNING! In the Partial Off mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. ESP/BAS Warning Lamp and ESP/TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven STARTING AND OPERATING 287 several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. NOTE: • The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously. • The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation. TSC (Trailer Sway Control) TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system will reduce engine power and apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once the swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ⬙Trailer Towing⬙ in section 5 of this manual for other information on towing a trailer with your vehicle. MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) - 5.7L Engine Only This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect. 5 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ROCKING THE VEHICLE If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE, while applying slight pressure to the accelerator. TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. NOTE: • P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. STARTING AND OPERATING 289 • European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H • Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. • LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. • High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. 5 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards T = Temporary Spare tire 31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in) 215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%) —Ratio of section height to section width of tire. 10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in) R = Construction Code —⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction. —⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction. 15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in) STARTING AND OPERATING 291 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index —A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry. H = Speed Symbol —A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions. —The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits). Load Identification: ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire Light Load = Light Load Tire C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry. Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. 5 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation —This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use. MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits) ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits) —03 means the 3rd week. 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits) —01 means the year 2001. —Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991. STARTING AND OPERATING 293 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side “B” pillar. 5 Tire and Loading Information Tire Placard Location This placard tells you important information about the: 1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) the total weight your vehicle can carry 3) the tire size designed for your vehicle 4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear and spare tires. 294 STARTING AND OPERATING Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.) STARTING AND OPERATING 295 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392 Kg). 5 296 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. 1. Safety— WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents. • Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure. • Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. 5 298 STARTING AND OPERATING 2. Economy— Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption. 3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability— Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B” pillar. Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure Information” section of this manual. Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated. STARTING AND OPERATING 299 CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 5 300 STARTING AND OPERATING loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). Radial-Ply Tires WARNING! Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine them with other types of tires. Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. WARNING! CAUTION! Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time. 5 302 STARTING AND OPERATING Limited Use Spare — If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. WARNING! The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h). Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this manual. STARTING AND OPERATING 303 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. 5 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point. 304 STARTING AND OPERATING Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to: Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. • Driving style Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for the size designation of your tire. The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. • Tire pressure • Distance driven WARNING! Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. STARTING AND OPERATING 305 WARNING! CAUTION! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have an accident. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in: • Fast tire wear. • Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided wear. • Vehicle pull to right or left. Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right. Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer for proper diagnosis. 5 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration. Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear. SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION – IF EQUIPPED A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passengers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo. Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle will be found on the face of the driver’s door. SNOW TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construction as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire. These tires should always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. STARTING AND OPERATING 307 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure (the placard is located on the drivers side B-pillar). Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules” Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to the “Tires – General Information” in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. 5 308 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects. The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM warning lamp to be turned off. The system will automatically update and the TPM warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 kph) to receive this information. Base System – If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module. NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) consists of the following components: • Receiver Module • 4 Wheel Sensors • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp STARTING AND OPERATING 309 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer. The system will automatically update and the TPM warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 kph) to receive this information. A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to sound. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will sound when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until the fault condition no longer exists. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. NOTE: A non-matching or compact spare wheel and tire assembly does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor; therefore, it will not be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). If the non-matching or compact spare tire was used in place of one of the four road tires, a system fault will occur while driving the vehicle. In case of a low pressure condition (ie. flat tire), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on solid until the original road tire has been properly repaired, and put back onto the vehicle in place of the non-matching or compact spare tire. 5 310 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the wheel rim sensor. NOTE: • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. STARTING AND OPERATING 311 • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale lamp. General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses: United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123 Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines (except 5.7L engines) are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The routine use of premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions the use of premium fuel will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance. The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance.The routine use of premium gasoline is not recommended. The use of premium 5 312 STARTING AND OPERATING gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto manufacturers world-wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available. Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 313 CAUTION! DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components. NOTE: 4.7L Engine — If Equipped , is now rated for E85 Ethanol use. Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85. For more information, refer to “Flexible Fuel” in this section. Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol. MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolines blended with MMT provide no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance. We recommend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines. 5 314 STARTING AND OPERATING Materials Added To Fuel All gasolines sold in the United States are required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, damage the emission control system. • An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your dealer for service assistance. • When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage may result. • The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended. Many of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. STARTING AND OPERATING 315 NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monox- • • ide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. 5 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL CAUTION! Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. NOTE: To avoid contact between fuel cap and paint, hang tether strap over hook provided on inner fuel door. CAUTION! Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on. CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING! WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on. A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly tightened. If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If 5 318 STARTING AND OPERATING the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. CAUTION! Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. WARNING! • Never add fuel when the engine is running. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled. FLEXIBLE FUEL E-85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles. STARTING AND OPERATING 319 CAUTION! Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85. ETHANOL FUEL (E-85) E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. WARNING! Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame. Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided. When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that • you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1/4 full • you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling • you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability during warm up. 5 320 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F, you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed. Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles Whether operating the vehicle on an E-85 ethanol fuel or unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the same. Refer to the “Maintenance Procedures” section of this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine oil. Starting The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F. In the range of 0°F to 32°F, you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. Cruising Range Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline operation. Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts. CAUTION! Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow Schedule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual. CAUTION! Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability. 5 VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver’s side door. This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and shows the Month, Day, and 322 STARTING AND OPERATING Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires, or wheels). Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that GVWR is not exceeded. Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options, and cargo. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded. Tire Size This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed. Inflation Pressure (Cold) This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR. STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added. Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. 5 324 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. A loaded vehicle is shown in the following example. Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR capabilities are exceeded. Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten service life. NOTE: The weights shown in this chart are not the weights for your vehicle. Also, the amount of load added to both the front and rear axles can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed both in its ⴖcurb weightⴖ condition, and in its ⴖloaded and ready for operationⴖ condition. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS. STARTING AND OPERATING 325 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a driver). 5 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. WARNING! It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Tongue Weight (TW) The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer. TSC (Trailer Sway Control) – If Equipped • Trailer Sway Control – Electronic TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system will reduce engine power and apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once the swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations. Even if your vehicle is equipped with electronic trailer sway control, mechanical sway control is recommended when appropriate for the size of your trailer. STARTING AND OPERATING 327 • Trailer Sway Control – Mechanical The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements. 5 328 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident. Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. Weight Distributing Hitch System STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed. Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Fifth-Wheel Hitch A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin. Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package content. The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer 5 330 STARTING AND OPERATING Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain. Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) Class II - Medium 3,500 lbs (1587 kg) Duty Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg) Class IV - Extra 10,000 lbs (4540 kg) Heavy Duty Fifth Wheel/ Greater than 10,000 lbs Gooseneck (4540 kg) All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses: • http:// www.dodge.com/towing. • http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada). Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents. STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. • The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: • The tongue weight of the trailer. Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended: 5 332 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! WARNING! • Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle. • During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h). Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident. Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings. • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires. STARTING AND OPERATING 333 • Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels. • GCWR must not be exceeded. • Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: 1. GVWR 2. GTW 3. GAWR 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight). Towing Requirements — Tires − Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire. − Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures. − Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. 5 334 STARTING AND OPERATING − Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure. − When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits. Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury. − An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. − Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). CAUTION! If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. STARTING AND OPERATING 335 WARNING! NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. 5 Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. 4 - Pin Connector 336 STARTING AND OPERATING If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage. Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “TOW HAUL” feature should be selected. 7- Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic. NOTE: Using the “TOW HAUL” feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking. The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals. STARTING AND OPERATING 337 NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing. Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped) To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, turn the “TOW HAUL” feature ON when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades. Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If Equipped) Towing Tips — Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions: − City Driving When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed. − Highway Driving Reduce speed. − Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. − Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily. − When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. − refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more information. − Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. 5 338 STARTING AND OPERATING SNOWPLOW CAUTION! Dodge Durango or Chrysler Aspen Models NOTE: Do not use Dodge Durango or Chrysler Aspen Models for snowplow applications. Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can cause damage to the vehicle. WARNING! WARNING! Snowplows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end or your vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in an accident. Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual STARTING AND OPERATING 339 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Recreational Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable. Towing the vehicle with the transmission in Neutral can cause severe transmission damage. Removal of the driveshaft for towing is not recommended since this allows transmission fluid to leak out. Recreational Towing 4WD Models WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. CAUTION! Vehicles equipped with an NV 144 Transfer Case (which has no neutral position) may NOT be used for recreational towing. CAUTION! Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing. 5 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: The NV 244 Generation II transfer case must be shifted into Neutral (N) for recreational towing. The Neutral (N) selection button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case Neutral (N) can take place with the selector switch in any mode position. Shifting into Neutral (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing. CAUTION! It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts. 1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Shut engine OFF. 3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. 4. Depress brake pedal. 5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N). 6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for 4 seconds. 7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light comes on release Neutral (N) button. 8. Start engine. 9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R). 10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement. STARTING AND OPERATING 341 11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive (D). 12. Turn ignition key to the unlocked OFF position. NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. 13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P). 14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar. NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button, and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elaspes and the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released. CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P) Shifting OUT of Neutral (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage. 1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Shut engine OFF. 5 342 STARTING AND OPERATING 3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. 4. Depress brake pedal. 5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N). 6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for 1 second. 7. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release the Neutral (N) button. 8. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch. 9. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P). 10. Start the engine. 11. Shift automatic transmission into Drive (D). NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button, and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met during the 1 second time, then all of the position indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released. NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the key is not On, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met. STARTING AND OPERATING 343 CAUTION! • Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged. • Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage internal parts. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood inner surface. The following information about your vehicle is displayed on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identification Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers with descriptions of all production and special equipment on the truck as shipped from the factory. NOTE: Always refer to the equipment identification plate when ordering parts. 5 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 䡵 Jump Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 356 ▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 䡵 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 ▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 ▫ Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 6 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The flasher switch is on the top of the steering column, just behind the steering wheel. Press the flasher switch and all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently. Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency flashers. This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING! • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location The scissor jack and tire changing tools are stowed under the second row seat. The jack is secured in place with a winged stud and a fixed stud. It is very important to secure the jack tightly in place by engaging the slot in the base to the fixed stud under the middle seat. The winged stud inserts through the eyelet in the end of the jack’s worm screw. 6 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES JACKING INSTRUCTIONS Removing The Spare Tire The spare tire on your vehicle is located underneath the vehicle in the rear. 1. Remove the rubber plug from the floor in the cargo area. 2. Engage the jack wrench extension to the spare tire winch through the hole in the floor. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck. 3. Turn the wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire. Continue to turn the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349 It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose cable. Tire Changing Procedure WARNING! CAUTION! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch. Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The scissor jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only. It is not recommended that the jack be used for service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time. 6 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES • Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel. Preparations Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK (automatic transmission). On Four Wheel Drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L” position. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher. • Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. Instructions 1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage. 2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of the frame (prior to inboard transition. Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench - the tube extension, may be used but is not required. When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as posssible with the drive tubes extending to the rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench. 6 Rear Left Jacking Location Front Jacking Location 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. Rear Right Jacking Location Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required. 4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface. 5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered. NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts. 6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 135 ± 10 ft. lbs. (183 ± 14 N·m) dynamic torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353 WARNING! WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Always stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided. Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the • 7. Remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage. 8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described. 9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible. NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts. • • • • • • • edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking. Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack. Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. Only use the jack in the positions indicated. If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the value stem facing the ground. 6 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES To Stow The Flat Or Spare Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening. For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle. Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click 2 times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place. JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water. • A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a light or bright colored dot is visible in the indicator (if equipped), DO NOT jump-start the battery. If the indicator (if equipped) is dark or shows a green dot, proceed as follows: 1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact. 2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles. 3. Turn OFF heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical loads. 4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery. WARNING! Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. 5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good contact on the engine. 6 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! WARNING! Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode. During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode. The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start. Any procedure other than above could result in: 1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent; 2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion; 6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. 7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan. 3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle. EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks. NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 WARNING! CAUTION! Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle. WARNING! Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing serious injury. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recommended. Attach towing device to main structural members of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed. 6 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly. Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) and the distance must not exceed 15 miles (25 km). If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km ) or faster than 30 mph, it must be towed on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground, or with the front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly. NOTE: Towing the vehicle, with the rear wheels on the ground, at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than 15 miles (25 km ) can cause severe transmission damage. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 Engine Compartment 4.7L V-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 䡵 Engine Compartment 5.7L HEMI V-8 . . . . . . . . . 363 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 364 ▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 372 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 ▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 ▫ Engine Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 ▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 ▫ Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 7 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 ▫ Selection Of Lubricating Grease . . . . . . . . . . . 392 ▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 ▫ Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints . . . . . . . . 378 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 ▫ Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 ▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 ▫ Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 䡵 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 ▫ Fuses (Interior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 ▫ Fuses (Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . 401 ▫ Fuses (Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . . . . . 404 䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 ▫ Headlights/Parking/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . 407 ▫ Tail Lights, Turn Signals And Backup Lights — Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 ▫ License Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 ▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . 412 䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 415 ▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 7 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4.7L V-8 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5.7L HEMI V-8 7 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready for testing. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do the following: For states which have an I/M (Inspection and Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery replacement. If the OBD system is determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. 1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch. 2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 7 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. 4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen: a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 seconds and then remain on until the first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. b. The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD system is not ready you should see your dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation, you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals, there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance. However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it 7 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance. These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines. CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your style of driving affect the interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the following to determine if ANY apply to you: • Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C). • Stop and Go driving. • Extensive engine idling. • Driving in dusty conditions. • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km). • More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). • Trailer towing, Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service). • Off-Road or desert operation. • If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel. NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months whichever comes first. 4x4 Models, If Used Primarily For Off-Road Operation Every 50 hours of use. 7 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Dusty Conditions Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these conditions, special attention should be given to the engine air cleaner and the crankcase inlet air cleaner. The crankcase ventilation system should also be checked periodically. Make sure that these units are always clean. This will tend to reduce to a minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter the engine. Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacture only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacture only recommends API Certified engine oils. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the Engine Compartment illustration in this section. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change. Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended. 7 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required. However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if required. See your authorized dealer for service. At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure. Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure. Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components. Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine performance and emission control. The plugs installed in your vehicle should operate satisfactorily in normal service for the mileage indicated in the Maintenance Chart. New plugs should be installed at this mileage. The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug. Check the Vehicle Emissions Control Information label for the proper type of spark plug for your vehicle. CAUTION! When replacing plugs, do not overtighten. You could damage them and cause them to leak. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule “B”. WARNING! The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting. Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary. Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. 7 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! WARNING! Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle. A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. • Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions. Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. 7 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! WARNING! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive and negative (-) and identified on the battery case. • If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. Power Steering — Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙ WARNING! Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid. If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. Front Suspension Ball Joints The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever the vehicle is serviced for other reasons. Damaged seals should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination of the grease. 7 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints All four wheel drive models are equipped with four constant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required. However, the joint boot should be inspected for external leakage or damage periodically. If external leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately. Continued operation could result in failure of the joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease. This would require complete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure. Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, doors,liftgate and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. Windshield Washers The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Always fill the reservoir with windshield washer fluid (not radiator antifreeze). To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar威 All Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim. 7 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow the preceding safety tips. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Cooling System WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. 7 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled. If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution. Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type. CAUTION! Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants, may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible. Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant. When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% recommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C ) are anticipated. Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. 7 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. Points To Remember NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. • Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing. • If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. • Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components. • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean, also. 7 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. Emission Related Components Fuel System Hoses And Vapor/Vacuum Harnesses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance, inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be given to examining hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed. Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present. NOTE: Fluids such as oil, power steering fluid, and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle operation), should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage. You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specified hoses and clamps, or their equivalent in material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is mandatory to replace all clamps that have been loosened or removed during service. Care should be taken in installing new clamps to insure they are properly torqued. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plugging because of deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the PCV valve and passage with increasing mileage. Have the PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve – Do not attempt to clean the PCV valve! Check ventilating hose for indication of damage or plugging with deposits. Replace if necessary. Brake Master Cylinders The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally low, check system for leaks. Brake System Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. Power Disc Brakes (Front and Rear) Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several hard stops during the break-in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material. 7 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point, or is unidentified, as to specifications may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking. You could have an accident. Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Seal damage may result. WARNING! Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching on fire. Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture. Brake Hoses Inspection should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with possible burst failure. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 WARNING! Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure. You could have an accident. If you see any sign of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake hoses replaced immediately. Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180°F (82°C). This occurs after at least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly, the following procedure must be used: 1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature. 2. The vehicle must be on level ground. 3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal. 4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P (Park). 5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated. 6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT” (upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait 7 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature, the fluid level should be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70°F ( 21°C) (room temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature, it should be between the “HOT” (upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches 180°F ( 82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature. CAUTION! Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading. 7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube. Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change It is important that proper lubricant is used in the transmission. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives to the transmission. Exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be avoided, since they may adversely affect seals. Transfer Case Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the transfer case serviced immediately. CAUTION! Damage may result from operation of the vehicle with low transfer case fluid. The transfer case fluid should be drained and refilled at the intervals specified. Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. 7 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Axles Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. The manufacturer does not recommend regularly scheduled oil changes for axles in vehicles whose operation is classified as normal truck service. NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be encountered in some off-highway types of service, will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage. Rear Axle Rear Axle fluid levels should be 1/4⬙ (6.4 mm) +/- 1/4“ below the fill hole for 8 1/4⬙, and 9 1/4⬙ axles. Front Axle Front Axle fluid level should be 1/4” (6.4 mm) below the level of the fill hole. Selection of Lubricating Grease The National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) has developed a symbol (Certification Mark) to aid the vehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for chassis components. This symbol, an example shown below, is located on the grease container and identifies the application and quality of the grease. There are two groups identified, those for wheel bearings (Letter “G”) and those for chassis (Letter “L”) lubrication. Performance categories within these groups result in dual letter designations for each group. The letter designations shown in the example are the highest quality level available and when combined as shown can MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 be used for chassis lubrication. Use only those greases that have the NLGI symbol on the container along with the proper quality level for your application. What Causes Corrosion? Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion The most common causes are: Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. • Stone and gravel impact. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. • If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible. 7 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Use Mopar威 auto polish to remove road film and stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to scratch the paint. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels and liftgate be kept clear and open. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. CAUTION! Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch metal and painted surfaces. Special Care • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. • If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 • Use Mopar威 touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel. Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish. • For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If equipped YES Essentials威 seats may be cleaned in the following manner: • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. • For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-purpose cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essentials products. Interior Care Use Mopar威 Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting. Use Mopar威 Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and trim. 7 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. WARNING! Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. 2. Dry with a soft tissue. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage will also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. 7 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSE BLOCK CAUTION! When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. NOTE: If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for longer than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may do this by disconnecting the battery or by disconnecting the two ignition-off draw (I.O.D.) fuses located in the Auxiliary Power Distribution Center (PDC) located in the engine compartment. The I.O.D. cavities include a snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the fuse block. Pressing the I.O.D. fuse back into the cavity reconnects it. Fuses (Interior) The fuse block contains blade-type mini-fuses, relays, and circuit breakers for high-current circuits. It is located in the left kick panel. It is accessible through a snap-in cover. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Cavity F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Mini Fuse/Color Description Instrument Cluster 15 Amp Blue Battery Feed 10 Amp Red Spare Ignition Run/Start for Next Generation Controller (NGC), Inte10 Amp Red grated Power Module (IPM), AC Relay and Fuel Pump Relay Door Node and Non10 Amp Red Memory Power Mirror Switch Battery Feed Airbags (2 Fuses in (2) 10 Amp Red Yellow Holder) Ignition Run/Start 2 Amp Clear Unlock 25 Amp Natural Radio Battery Feed 7 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE F8 10 Amp Red F9 10 Amp Red F10 F11 F12 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow F13 10 Amp Red F14 10 Amp Red Ignition Run/Start for Cluster/Transfer Case/Seat Sw. Back lighting Satellite Digital Audio Receiver (SDAR)/ Digital Video Disc (DVD) Battery Feed Spare Heated Mirrors Cluster Battery Feed Ignition Run HVAC Module/Heated Rear Glass (EBL) Relay ABS Module Ignition Run F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 Battery Feed Blue Tooth, Compass/Trip 15 Amp Blue Computer (CMTC), Sentry Key Diagnostics Reconfigurable Power 20 Amp Yellow Outlets Ignition Run / Rear 20 Amp Yellow Park Assist / Second Row Heated Seats 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Ignition 10 Amp Red Spare Fuse Heating & Air Condi15 Amp Blue tioning w/ATC Only Battery Feed 25 Amp Natural Amplifier Battery Feed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Fuses (Power Distribution Center) stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. These fuses and relays can be obtained from your dealer. Cavity 1 2 3 Power Distribution Center Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distribution center located in the left side of the engine compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A description of each fuse and component may be 4 5 6 Cartridge Fuse / Mini Fuse Description Relay 30 Amp Starter Pink 30 Amp Front Wiper Pink 40 Amp Brake Batt Green 30 Amp JB Feed Acc # 2 Pink 40 Amp Power Seats Green 30 Amp Run Remote Relay Pink Feed 7 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Cartridge Fuse / Mini Fuse Description Relay 40 Amp Blower Motor Relay Green Feed 40 Amp JB Feed Acc Delay Green Spare 30 Amp ASD Pink 40 Amp Power Liftgate ( If Green Equipped) 40 Amp JB Feed / Heated Green Rear Glass (EBL)/ T Case Brake 30 Amp JB Feed RR Pink 40 Amp ESP Pump Green Cavity 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Cartridge Fuse / Mini Fuse Relay 50 Amp Red 10 Amp Red Spare 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 25 Amp Clear 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow Description JB Feed Spare Fuel Pump Next Generation Controller (NGC) 115v Power Inverter ABS Batt Next Generation Controller (NGC) Batt MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Cavity 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Cartridge Fuse / Mini Fuse Relay 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue Spare 20 Amp Yellow Spare Relay Relay Spare Relay Description Cavity Trailer Tow 33 A/C Clutch 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Stop Lamp Switch Run/Start Relay Feed Run Start Run Remote Starter Cartridge Fuse / Mini Fuse Description Relay Relay Electronic Automatic Transaxle (EATX) Relay AC Clutch Relay Fuel Pump Rly Spare Relay Stop Lamp Switch Spare Relay Blower Motor Relay Auto Shut Down (ASD) Rly 7 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Fuses (Integrated Power Module) otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Cavity 1 2 3 4 5 6 Integrated Power Module An integrated Power Module is located in the left side of the engine compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover 7 8 9 Cartridge Fuse / Mini Fuse Description Relay Relay Wiper On/Off Rly Relay Wiper Hi/Lo Rly Relay Horn Rly Relay Rear Wiper Rly Relay Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/ Turn Rly Relay Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/ Turn Rly Relay Park Lamps Rly 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps Red 10 Amp Trailer-Tow Park Red Lamps MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Cavity 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Cartridge Fuse / Mini Fuse Relay 10 Amp Red Relay 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow Description Cavity Rt Park Lamps 18 Radiator Fan Hi Rly Front Control Module (FCM) Batt #4 Front Control Module (FCM) Batt #2 Adjustable Pedal 19 20 21 22 Ft Fog Lamps 23 Horn Rear Wiper 24 25 26 Cartridge Fuse / Mini Fuse Relay 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green Relay Relay Relay Description Front Control Module (FCM) Batt #1 Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/ Turn Front Control Module (FCM) Batt #3 Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/ Turn Front Control Module (FCM) BATT # 5 Radiator Fan Radiator Fan Lo Rly Ft Fog Lamps Rly Adjustable Pedal Rly 7 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 27 28 29 30 Cartridge Fuse / Mini Fuse Relay 30 Amp Green 30 Amp Green Description Ignition Off Draw (IOD) #1 Ignition Off Draw (IOD) #2 Spare Spare VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle’s battery: • Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The I.O.D. cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the fuse block. • The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain. • As an alternative to the above steps you may disconnect the negative cable from the battery. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No. Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2 Liftgate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Overhead Console Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLW214–2A Reading Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2 Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not Serviceable LIGHT BULBS — Outside Bulb No. Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13 Front Park/Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3457AK Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 Center High Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006LL License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal and Side Marker . . . . 3057 BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights/Parking/Turn Signal 1. Remove the two bolts attaching the headlight to the upper fender reinforcement (hood must be opened to access bolts). 7 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Remove one nut that attaches the headlight to the inner fender panel. Access to the nut is possible by opening the fender panel access door which is located in the wheel liner. 4. While firmly holding the headlight in your hands disconnect all connectors by following the procedure described in step number 5 below. 5. Remove the bulb connector from the headlight making sure to pull and release the red tab on all connectors. Loosen the connector by pressing down on the black and/or green release which is located below or above the red tab. The green release is located above the red tab on the H13, the black release is located above the 3457AK red tab. 6. Twist and remove socket from lamp. 7. Remove bulb from socket and replace. 3. Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the headlight from the fender panel. NOTE: These are Halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat build-up which reduces bulb life. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Tail Lights, Turn Signals And Backup Lights — Replacement 2. Rotate the light to the outboard side of the vehicle and remove. 1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing. 7 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Unlock and remove electrical connector. 4. Twist bulb sockets counterclockwise to remove from housing. 5. Remove the bulbs from the bulb sockets by pulling the bulb straight out. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 License Lights 2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise. 1. Push tab towards the lamp and remove lamp assembly. 3. Pull bulb from socket. 7 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Center High-Mounted Stoplight 1. Remove two screws securing stoplight housing assembly to the liftgate. 3. Pull bulb straight from socket to remove. 2. Turn socket 1/4 counterclockwise and free from housing. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Fog Lights 2. Remove the remove the far left air dam screw at the bottom of the fascia. 3. Peel back the liner and access the foglamp 4. Rotate the socket and connector 1/4 turn counterclockwise and pull straight reward to disengage from the lamp. 5. Remove the bulb from the socket and replace. The right foglamp can be accessed from below the vehicle. Follow the previous steps 4 and 5 of the left foglamp to replace the bulb. 1 – (3) Wheel liner screws 2 – (1) Air dam screw To replace the left foglamp bulb: 1. Remove the three wheel liner screws NOTE: These are Halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat build-up, which reduces bulb life. 7 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U.S. Metric 27 Gal. 27 Gal 102L 102L 6 Qt. 7 Qt. 5.7L 6.6L 14.2 Qt. 13.5L 16.6 Qt. 15.8L Fuel 4.7L, 87 Octane 5.7L, 89 Octane Engine Oil (with filter) 4.7L, SAE 5W-20, API Certified 5.7L, SAE 5W-20, API Certified Cooling System (includes 2.1 Qts./2L for coolant bottle 4.7L Engine(Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 5.7L Engine (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) NOTE: All fluid capacities are approximate. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant 4.7L Engine Oil 5.7L Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 4.7L Fuel Selection 5.7L Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent. Use SAE 5W-20, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 or equivalent. Use SAE 5W-20, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 or equivalent. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent. Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment. 87 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method 89 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method 7 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Chassis Component Automatic Transmission Transfer Case Front Axle Rear Axle Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts. Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. SAE 75W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent. SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent. Mopar威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS M A I N T E N A N C E 䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 418 ▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 ▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 C S H E D U L E S 8 M A I N T E N A N C E 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold type on the following pages must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system. These, and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best vehicle performance and S reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for C vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty H areas and very short trip driving. E D U L E S 8 Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected. NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle. First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule. • Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C). • Stop and go driving. • Extensive engine idling. • Driving in dusty conditions. • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km). • More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C). • Trailer towing. • Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service). MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419 M • Off-road or desert operation. • If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel. NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months, whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙. Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule ⬙B⬙. A I N T E N NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in- A tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months N C whichever comes first. E Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval that occurs first. CAUTION! Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle. S C H E D U L E S 8 M 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I At Each Stop for Fuel N T • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully E warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while N the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuA N racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the C level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark. E S C H E D U L E S 8 • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required. Once a Month • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required. • Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed. • Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation. At Each Oil Change • Change the engine oil filter. • Inspect the exhaust system. • Inspect the brake hoses. • Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspension components. • Check the automatic transmission fluid level. • Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps. SCHEDULE “B” Schedule “B” Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions. • Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C). • Stop and go driving. • Extensive engine idling. • Driving in dusty conditions. • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km). • More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C). • Trailer towing. 421 M A I N T • Off-road or desert operation. E • If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) N A fuel. N C NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your E • Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service). engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the S C ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. H NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months, whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. E D U L E S 8 M 422 SCHEDULE “B” A I N Miles T (Kilometers) E N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 A months whichever comes first. N C Rotate tires. E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct S C H E D U L E S 8 stowage. Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. 3,000 (5 000) 6,000 (10 000) 9,000 (15 000) 12,000 (20 000) 15,000 (25 000) X X X X X X X X X X X SCHEDULE “B” Miles (Kilometers) Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months whichever comes first. Rotate tires. Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. Replace spark plugs. Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** 18,000 (30 000) X X X 21,000 (35 000) X 24,000 (40 000) X X X 27,000 (45 000) X 423 M 30,000 (50 000) X X X X X X X X X A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 424 SCHEDULE “B” A I N Miles T (Kilometers) E N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 A months whichever comes first. N C Rotate tires. E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct S C H E D U L E S 8 stowage. Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. 33,000 (55 000) X 36,000 (60 000) X X X 39, 000 (65 000) X 42,000 (70 000) X 45,000 (75 000) X X X X X X SCHEDULE “B” Miles (Kilometers) Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months whichever comes first. Rotate tires. Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. Replace spark plugs. Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change main sump filter. This applies only if your vehicle is used for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Inspect transfer case fluid (4X4). Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, or 102, 000 miles (170 000 km) whichever comes first. 48,000 (80 000) X X X 51,000 (85 000) X 54,000 (90 000) X X X 57,000 (95 000) X 425 M 60,000 (100 000) X X X X X X X X X X X X A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 426 SCHEDULE “B” A I N Miles T (Kilometers) E N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 A months whichever comes first. N C Rotate tires. E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct S C H E D U L E S 8 stowage. Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. 63,000 (105 000) X 66,000 (110 000) X X X 69,000 (115 000) X 72,000 (120 000) X 75,000 (125 000) X X X X X X SCHEDULE “B” Miles (Kilometers ) Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months whichever comes first. Rotate tires. Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. Replace spark plugs. Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. 78,000 (130 000) X X X 81,000 (135 000) X 84,000 (140 000) X X X 87,000 (145 000) X 427 M 90,000 (150 000) X X X X X X X X X X A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 428 SCHEDULE “B” A I N Miles T (Kilometers) E N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months A whichever comes first. N C Rotate tires. E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. S C H E D U L E S 8 Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60 months. 93,000 (155 000) X 96,000 (160 000) X X X 99,000 (165 000) X 102,000 (170 000) X X X X SCHEDULE “B” Miles (Kilometers) Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months whichever comes first. Rotate tires. Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. Replace spark plugs. Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. 105,000 (175 000) X 108,000 (180 000) X X X X 429 M 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000 (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 430 SCHEDULE “B” A I N Miles T (Kilometers) E N Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid A and change main sump filter and spin-on N cooler return filter if equipped. This applies C only if your vehicle is used for police, taxi, E S C H E D U L E S 8 fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km). 105,000 (175 000) 108,000 (180 000) 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000 (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000) X X SCHEDULE “B” Miles (Kilometers) Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown or 3 months, whichever comes first. Rotate tires. Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. 123,000 (205 000) 126,000 (210 000) X X 431 M 129,000 132,000 135,000 138,000 (215 000) (220 000) (225 000) (230 000) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 432 SCHEDULE “B” A I N Miles T (Kilometers) E N Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown A or 3 months, whichever comes first. N C Rotate tires. E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. S C H E D U L E S 8 Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. Replace spark plugs. Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. ** Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. 141,000 (235 000) 144,000 (240 000) 147,000 (245 000) 150,000 (250 000) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X SCHEDULE “B” Miles (Kilometers) Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change main sump filter and spin-on cooler return filter if equipped. This applies only if your vehicle is used for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Flush and replace engine coolant if not replaced at 120,000 miles (200 000 km). Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts. 141,000 (235 000) 144,000 (240 000) 147,000 (245 000) 433 M 150,000 (250 000) X A I N T E N A N C E X S C ** This maintenance is recommended by the manufac- H turer to the owner, but not required to maintain the E D emissions warranty. U L E S 8 M 434 SCHEDULE “A” A I Schedule “A” N T Miles E N (Kilometers) A [Months] N C Change engine oil and engine oil filter. E Rotate tires. S C H E D U L E S 8 Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace as necessary. Replace spark plugs. 6,000 (10 000) [6] X X X 12,000 (20 000) [12] X X X 18,000 (30 000) [18] X X X 24,000 (40 000) [24] X X X 30,000 (50 000) [30] X X X X X X X SCHEDULE “A” Miles (Kilometers) [Months] Change engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. Replace spark plugs. Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. ** Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. 36,000 (60 000) [36] X X X 42,000 (70 000) [42] X X X 48,000 (80 000) [48] X X 54,000 (90 000) [54] X X X 60,000 66,000 (100 000) (110 000) [60] [66] X X X X X X X X X 435 M X X X X X A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 436 SCHEDULE “A” A I N Miles T (Kilometers) E N [Months] A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. N C Rotate tires. E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct S C H E D U L E S 8 stowage. Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. Replace spark plugs. Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. 72,000 (120 000) [72] X X X X 78,000 (130 000) [78] X X X 84,000 (140 000) [84] X X X 90,000 (150 000) [90] X X X X X X X X X 96,000 (160 000) [96] X X X SCHEDULE “A” Miles (Kilometers) [Months] Change engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. Check transfer case fluid (4X4). Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60 months. Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km). Inspect brake linings. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace as necessary. Replace spark plugs. Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. 102,000 (170000) [102] X X X 108,000 (180 000) [108] X X X 114,000 (190 000) [114] X X X 437 M 120,000 (200 000) [120] X X X X X X X X X X X A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 438 SCHEDULE “A” A I N Miles T (Kilometers) E N [Months] A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. N C Rotate tires. E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct S C H E D U L E S 8 stowage. Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 120,000 miles (200 000 km). Inspect brake linings. Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. Replace spark plugs. Inspect PCV Valve, replace as necessary. ** 126,000 (210 000) [126] X X 132,000 (220 000) [132] X X 138,000 (230 000) [138] X X 144,000 (240 000) [144] X X 150,000 (250 000) [150] X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X SCHEDULE “A” Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts. ** This Maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty. 439 M WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 445 䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 9 442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty, discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem. Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident, or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know. Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items, and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443 technicians, special tools, and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership. They want to know if you need assistance. • If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center. Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer Center should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) • Dealership name • Vehicle identification number • Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: (800) 992-1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone —(800) 465–2001 In Mexico contact: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F. In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240 Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240 9 444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about your service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to your contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 445 WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to this vehicle. MOPAR姞 PARTS Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from your dealer. They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, and the manufacturer. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. In Canada: If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9. 9 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals. (No P.O. Boxes). • Service Manuals. These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. • Diagnostic Procedure Manuals. Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations, these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. • Owner’s Manuals. These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447 Call Toll Free at: • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at: • www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com • www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals 9 INDEX 10 450 INDEX ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,275 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 373 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,376 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376,377 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,376 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,363,373 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,306 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,196 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,73 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,190 Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 382,383,414 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 275,279 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,190 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,83 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,258 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255,258,389 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,416 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 INDEX 451 Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,363,375 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 24 Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275,387 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275,279 Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,193 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 71 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering . . . . . . . . . Radiator (Coolant Pressure) Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 370 377 383 393 10 452 INDEX Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,161,315 Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Cargo Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Cargo Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,208 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,232 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,63 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,70 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Climate Control, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,244 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,198,202,210,222 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,175 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,151 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . 362,363,383 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,384 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 INDEX 453 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 . . . . . . 382,414,415 . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . 73,235,236,241,242 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . 226 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 142 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 193,283 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 152 10 454 INDEX Emergency, In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 418 Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,363 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,72,315 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,414,415 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,363,370 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,72,315,380 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,380 Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,415 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 INDEX 455 Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,187,409 Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348,354 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,319 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,175 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387,416 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 415 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,413 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,120 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,415 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,414 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 10 456 INDEX Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,398,401,404 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,317,364 Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,311 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,326 Gross Cargo Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,324 Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 137 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 137 INDEX 457 Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 160 129 386 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,63 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,349 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Key, Replacement . . . . . Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) Keyless Entry System . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 15 19 12 51 10 458 INDEX Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . 135,187,409 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,45 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . 65 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,131 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,196 Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . 193,283 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,188,413 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,187 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,151 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,188 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 194 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,409 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 187 INDEX 459 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . 65 Lubricating Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 194,365 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Manual Transmission Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,83 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 10 460 INDEX Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,445 Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Occupant Classification System (OCS) . . . . . . . . . . 55 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,415 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,415 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,414 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,414 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,365 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,261 Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,151 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 446 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 INDEX 461 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 293 Positive Crankcase Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Power Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . 362,363,401 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,28 Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . 169,170 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,377 Steering Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,363 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . 155,162,165 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,162,165 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 381,383 Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,208,232 Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222,226 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,208 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Rear Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 10 462 INDEX Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 340 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 341 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 230 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,67 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222,226 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,39,73 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,63 INDEX 463 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Fold and Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115,117 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115,117 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,190 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 382,415 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,418 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,198,202,210,222 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Shifting Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,187,409 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,302 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 10 464 INDEX Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,377 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . 230 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . 306 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 238 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 187 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 293,306 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,297 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 INDEX 465 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,294 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,297 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,281 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 10 466 INDEX Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,258 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,389 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,389 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,416 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . 24 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 160 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . 23 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,187,409 UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Vehicle Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294,321 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Video Entertainment System (Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 187 Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 INDEX 467 Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,363 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Weight Load Carrying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,241 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,139,379 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,362,363,379 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 395 10 NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES